GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: FDI-Adaptive Supertrend as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a measure of the complexity or irregularity of a geometric shape or pattern. It is a mathematical concept that quantifies the degree of self-similarity or self-affinity of an object at different scales. The FDI is a real number that represents the scaling behavior of an object in a particular space, and it can be used to characterize a wide range of natural and synthetic phenomena, from coastlines to fractal art.
The FDI is based on the concept of fractals, which are objects that exhibit self-similar or self-affine patterns at different scales. Fractals are characterized by their fractional dimensionality, which is a non-integer number that describes their complexity. The FDI is a measure of this fractional dimensionality, and it can be calculated using a variety of mathematical techniques, including box counting, wavelet analysis, and Fourier analysis.
In practical terms, the FDI can be used to quantify the complexity or roughness of natural surfaces, such as soil or rock, as well as the irregularity of synthetic materials, such as concrete or ceramics. It is also used in image analysis and pattern recognition to characterize the complexity of digital images and to detect patterns that are difficult to discern with traditional methods.
In forex trading, the Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a technical indicator used to analyze market trends and price movements. The FDI is calculated based on the fractal geometry of price charts and is used to identify support and resistance levels, as well as potential changes in trend direction.
The FDI indicator works by measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements. Fractals are self-similar or self-affine patterns that repeat at different scales, and they can be used to identify key levels of support and resistance in the market. The FDI indicator calculates the fractal dimension of price movements over a specified time period, and it plots the result as a line on the price chart.
Traders use the FDI indicator to identify potential trend changes and to confirm trend direction. When the FDI line crosses above or below a key level, such as 1.5, it may indicate a potential trend reversal. Additionally, when the FDI line is trending in the same direction as the price, it can confirm the current trend and provide additional confidence for traders.
Overall, the Fractal Dimension Index is a technical indicator that can be used to analyze market trends and price movements in forex trading. By measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements, traders can identify potential support and resistance levels and confirm trend direction.
What is Supertrend?
Supertrend is a popular technical indicator used in trading to identify trends in the market. It is a trend-following indicator that helps traders to identify the direction of the market trend and to enter or exit trades accordingly.
The Supertrend indicator is based on the Average True Range (ATR) and the price action of an asset. It plots a line on the price chart that follows the trend of the asset and indicates potential support and resistance levels. The Supertrend line changes its color when the trend changes, which can be used as a signal to enter or exit trades.
The Supertrend indicator is used to identify both long-term and short-term trends in the market. When the Supertrend line is above the price, it indicates a downtrend, and when it is below the price, it indicates an uptrend. Traders can use the Supertrend indicator to identify potential entry and exit points for their trades, as well as to set stop-loss orders and take-profit levels.
Supertrend is a popular indicator among traders because it is easy to use and can be applied to a variety of markets and timeframes. However, like any technical indicator, it is not perfect and can produce false signals in certain market conditions. Therefore, it is important to use the Supertrend indicator in combination with other indicators and to have a solid trading strategy in place.
What is FDI-Adaptive Supertrend?
FDI-Adaptive Supertrend uses FDI to adapt the period inputs into Supertrend to make Supertrend FDI-adaptive.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Cari dalam skrip untuk "entry"
GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter
Damiani Volatmeter is a volatility measurement indicator to determine whether volatility is high enough to trade.
Anything red means that volatility is low. Remember volatility doesn't have a direction. Anything green means volatility high despite the direction of price. The core signal line here is the green and red line that dips below two while threshold lines to "recharge". Maximum recharge happen when the core signal line shows a yellow ping. Soon after one or many yellow pings you should expect a massive upthrust of volatility . The idea here is you don't trade unless volatility is rising or green. This means that the Volatmeter has to dip into the recharge zone, recharge and then spike upward. You can also attempt to buy or sell reversals with confluence indicators when volatility is in the recharge zone, but I wouldn't recommend this. However, if you so choose to do this, then use the following indicator for confluence.
And last reminder, volatility doesn't have a direction! Red doesn't mean short, and green doesn't mean long, Red means don't trade period regardless of direction long/short, and green means trade no matter the direction long/short. This means you'll have to add an indicator that does show direction such as a mean reversion indicator like Fisher Transform or a Gaussian Filter. You can search my public scripts for various Fisher Transform and Gaussian Filter indicators.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR
The Parabolic SAR indicator typically uses a fixed acceleration factor and step to calculate its values, which can result in false signals or inefficient performance in certain market conditions. The Adaptive Parabolic SAR attempts to address this issue by dynamically adjusting its acceleration factor and step based on the current market volatility and price movement.
The Adaptive Parabolic SAR uses an algorithm that is designed to adjust the acceleration factor and step in real-time based on the recent price action. This allows the indicator to be more responsive to changes in the market, while still maintaining its ability to provide reliable signals.
The indicator works by plotting a series of dots above or below the price bars, depending on the direction of the trend. When the dots are below the price bars, it indicates a bullish trend, and when the dots are above the price bars, it indicates a bearish trend. The dots also move closer to the price bars as the trend becomes stronger, and further away as the trend weakens.
Traders can use the Adaptive Parabolic SAR as a tool to identify potential trend reversals or to confirm the current trend. It is often used in conjunction with other technical indicators and price action analysis to develop trading strategies.
The Kaufman adaptivity uses efficiency ratio to adapt PSAR while the Ehlers adaptivity uses raw Momentum.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
? Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
? GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother
The EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a type of filter that is designed to remove noise and provide a smoother representation of data. It is based on the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and uses a deviation correction technique to improve its accuracy. The result is a more precise and reliable signal that can be used for a variety of applications, such as technical analysis in trading or data smoothing in scientific research.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL
Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA (FDASMA) w/ DSL is a fractal-dimension-index-adaptive SMA . The SMA is accelerated during a trend and slowed down during a sideways market, so as to avoid false signals. This indicator uses the fractal dimension to compute an ingest period length into the SMA to output the FDASMA.
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What are DSL Discontinued Signal Line?
A lot of indicators are using signal lines in order to determine the trend (or some desired state of the indicator) easier. The idea of the signal line is easy : comparing the value to it's smoothed (slightly lagging) state, the idea of current momentum/state is made.
Discontinued signal line is inheriting that simple signal line idea and it is extending it : instead of having one signal line, more lines depending on the current value of the indicator.
"Signal" line is calculated the following way :
When a certain level is crossed into the desired direction, the EMA of that value is calculated for the desired signal line
When that level is crossed into the opposite direction, the previous "signal" line value is simply "inherited" and it becomes a kind of a level
This way it becomes a combination of signal lines and levels that are trying to combine both the good from both methods.
In simple terms, DSL uses the concept of a signal line and betters it by inheriting the previous signal line's value & makes it a level.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX as shown on the chart
Confirmation 1: GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA
ATR-Stepped PDF MA is and ATR-stepped moving average that uses a probability density function moving average.
What is Probability Density Function?
Probability Density Function (PDF) is a statistical function used to describe the likelihood of a continuous random variable taking on a particular value or range of values. In other words, it describes the probability distribution of a random variable over a continuous range of values.
The PDF is defined as the derivative of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of a continuous random variable. The CDF of a continuous random variable is the probability that the random variable takes on a value less than or equal to a given value. The PDF is a non-negative function that integrates to 1 over the entire range of the random variable.
The PDF is used to calculate the probability of the random variable taking on a value within a specific range. This is done by integrating the PDF over that range. The height of the PDF at a particular value of the random variable indicates the relative likelihood of that value occurring.
The PDF is an essential tool in many areas of statistics, including hypothesis testing, confidence interval estimation, and Bayesian inference.
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C T3 Velocity [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C T3 Velocity is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V T3 Velocity as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V T3 Velocity
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average (EMA) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average, which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp(-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3 ) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is Velocity?
Velocity can have different meanings depending on the context. Here are a few definitions:
In physics, velocity is a measure of the rate and direction of motion of an object. It is typically expressed in meters per second (m/s) or another unit of distance divided by time.
In finance and economics, velocity refers to the speed at which money circulates in an economy. It is usually measured as the ratio of gross domestic product (GDP) to the money supply.
In trading, velocity can refer to the speed and magnitude of price movements. It can be used as an indicator of momentum or trend strength.
What is T3 Velocity?
T3 Velocity is a better performing MACD that uses different hot (alpha) values for the slow and fast period inputs.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Swing Line [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Swing Line is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Swing Line as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Swing Line
The swing line indicator is a technical analysis tool used in financial markets to identify the direction of a trend. It is also known as the trendline or zigzag indicator.
The swing line indicator plots a series of lines connecting the highs and lows of price movements over a given time period. Each line represents a swing high or swing low in the price action, depending on whether the trend is bullish or bearish.
In an uptrend, the swing line indicator connects each successive higher low, forming an ascending trendline. In a downtrend, the indicator connects each successive lower high, forming a descending trendline. When the trend changes direction, the indicator will create a new line to reflect the new swing high or low.
Traders use the swing line indicator to identify key levels of support and resistance, as well as potential entry and exit points for trades. A break of the trendline can signal a potential trend reversal, while a bounce off the trendline can indicate that the trend is still intact.
The swing line indicator can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to confirm trends and reduce false signals. It is commonly used in forex, stock, and commodity markets, and is available on most charting platforms.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Jurik Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Jurik Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Jurik Smoother
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a smoothing function that reduces noise and false signals in price data. It is based on a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This helps to eliminate sudden price spikes and gaps in the data, making it easier to identify trends and patterns.
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a type of oscillator that was developed by Mark Jurik to reduce the noise and false signals that can be present in financial data. It is designed to be more responsive to changes in price trends than traditional oscillators, while also being less susceptible to whipsaw signals.
The Jurik Smoother is calculated using a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This means that it places greater emphasis on current price action, while smoothing out any erratic movements that could be caused by random fluctuations in the data.
One of the key features of the Jurik Smoother is its ability to adapt to changing market conditions. Unlike traditional oscillators, which use a fixed number of data points in their calculation, the Jurik Smoother adjusts its length based on the current volatility of the market. This helps to reduce lag time and increase the accuracy of the indicator in identifying trends.
The Jurik Smoother can be used in a variety of ways, including identifying trends, support and resistance levels, and potential entry and exit points for trades. It is particularly useful in markets that are prone to sudden price spikes and gaps, such as cryptocurrency and forex markets.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA
What is Jurik Filter?
The Jurik Filter is a technical analysis tool that is used to filter out market noise and identify trends in financial markets. It was developed by Mark Jurik in the 1990s and is based on a non-linear smoothing algorithm that provides a more accurate representation of price movements.
Traditional moving averages, such as the Simple Moving Average (SMA) or Exponential Moving Average (EMA), are linear filters that produce a lag between price and the moving average line. This can cause false signals during periods of market volatility, which can result in losses for traders and investors.
The Jurik Filter is designed to address this issue by incorporating a damping factor into the smoothing algorithm. This damping factor adjusts the filter's responsiveness to the changes in price, allowing it to filter out market noise without overshooting price peaks and valleys.
The Jurik Filter is calculated using a mathematical formula that takes into account the current and past prices of an asset, as well as the volatility of the market. This formula incorporates the damping factor and produces a smoother price curve than traditional moving average filters.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Filter is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Filter in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as the MACD or RSI, to confirm or complement their trading strategies. By filtering out market noise and identifying trends in the financial markets, the Jurik Filter can help improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
Overall, the Jurik Filter is a powerful technical analysis tool that can help traders and investors make more informed decisions about buying and selling securities. By providing a smoother price curve and reducing false signals, it can help improve trading performance and reduce risk in volatile markets.
What is Jurik Volatility?
Jurik Volatility is a technical analysis indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the volatility of financial markets. It is designed to provide a more accurate measure of market volatility than other traditional volatility indicators, such as the Average True Range (ATR) or Standard Deviation.
The Jurik Volatility indicator uses a non-linear smoothing algorithm that filters out market noise and provides a more accurate representation of price movements. It is calculated by taking the difference between the current price and a moving average of prices, and then applying a damping factor to adjust the responsiveness of the indicator to changes in volatility.
The damping factor used in the Jurik Volatility indicator adjusts the speed at which the indicator responds to changes in volatility. This makes it more responsive during periods of high volatility and less responsive during periods of low volatility. This helps to filter out false signals and provides a more accurate representation of market volatility.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Volatility indicator is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Volatility indicator to identify periods of high and low volatility in financial markets. It can help traders to adjust their trading strategies to suit different market conditions, and to manage their risk by adjusting their stop loss orders or position sizes.
Overall, the Jurik Volatility indicator is a useful tool for traders and investors who want to measure market volatility and make informed decisions about buying and selling securities. It can help to improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
What is the EMA?
The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a popular technical analysis indicator that gives more weight to recent price data than older data. It is a type of moving average that is calculated by applying a weighting factor to the price data based on the number of periods selected for the EMA calculation.
The formula for calculating the EMA is:
EMA = (Price(t) x Smoothing factor) + EMA(y) x (1 - Smoothing factor)
where:
-Price(t) is the current price
-EMA(y) is the EMA value for the previous period
-Smoothing factor = 2 / (Number of periods + 1)
The smoothing factor is used to give more weight to recent prices and less weight to older prices, with the weight decreasing exponentially over time. This makes the EMA more responsive to price changes than a simple moving average.
The EMA can be used to identify trend direction and potential reversals in the market. Traders often use EMAs of different periods to confirm trend direction and make trading decisions.
What is Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA?
This indicator combines Jurik Filter with Jurik Volatility to form an crete an alpha value that is then injected into the EMA calculation to create an adaptive EMA.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Strategy Developer ToolSolar Strategies: Strategy Developer Tool Complete Guide
This guide provides full explanation of the intended purpose of our script along with individual explanation of each input and the logic behind them coupled with general knowledge which we find useful in using our tool regarding elements of risk and strategy. Use this information wisely and understand we are not providing financial advise, this is a learning tool meant to help advance traders knowledge of the markets and their strategies which are formed as such.
Basics
Before getting into the specifics of how to use our strategy developer tool, it's important to understand a few basic fundamental things about it. The purpose of the tool is to allow the user to optimize a strategy through back testing with our strategy tracker and 50+ user inputs. The way you optimize your strategy depends on a couple things:
The state of the current and recent previous market.
The timeframe you trade on.
The types of trades you prefer. (swings, scalps, etc.)
How much risk you are willing to take on.
Risk Basics:
Going off the last bullet point on the list above, risk plays a huge part in how you optimize your strategy, with that being said here are a few general rules of risk as they relate to trades:
The more trades you take on, the more risk you are opening your strategy up to.
If done correctly, more trades will often result in more profit with slightly lower accuracy, and more risk.
The less trades you take on, the easier it is to have higher accuracy because ideally by rooting out the losing trades, you are left with fewer overall trades but mostly winning trades.
Less trades with higher accuracy often result in less profit but will 100% be less risky than the opposite. (More trades, less accurate, more profit, MORE RISK)
Input Basics:
More trades, less trades, more risk, less risk, what does this all mean as it relates to our tool?
The 50+ user inputs that allow you to optimize and create your strategy all effect when the script takes a trade.
Many of the inputs are essentially conditions. By changing these inputs, what you are doing is changing how specific the conditions need to be in order to take a trade.
This is how the inputs tie into the bullet point list above regarding risk and the number of trades you take on. By raising or lowering certain inputs, you are making the conditions more or less specific on when to trade.
Making conditions more specific will allow for less trades to be taken and will often result in a higher win rate, and less associated risk.
Making conditions less specific will allow for more trades to be taken and depending on the state of the market, could result in more profit being realized, but at the same time opens you up to more risk because you are stating a more general set of conditions in order to take a trade.
How does it work?
Our strategy developer tool is based on two simple factors in order to identify specific areas in the market deemed good for trade. They are as follows:
Directional momentum to identify when a move might happen.
A confirmation of the desired move.
Indicators:
The tool gets its information on these two factors from two custom built indicators which are hard coded into the script. These two indicators and the inputs which affect them can be found labeled with Indicator 1 or Indicator 2 in the tool's settings.
When the conditions are met based on the factors of both indicators, it then decides your stop losses and take profits using pivot points.
Indicator 1 is the momentum indicator.
Indicator 2 looks for confirmation of the move.
Hedges:
Since nothing is ever certain when trading, our tool also aims to minimize potential loss before it can happen by incorporating hedges when a signal prints in the opposite direction of the trade you are currently in.
To identify when to hedge, the candles will appear with the opposite color of your original trade. Candles, while in a long trade, appear as green and candles while in a short trade appear as red. While in a long trade the only time red candles will appear is when a hedge occurs and vice versa for shorts.
Example: If you just took a long trade based on a long signal that the script gave off, but a short signal prints off while you are in the long, you are directed to sell half your long position and enter that half into a short position. Since there is now more uncertainty in the long because of the short signal, minimizing your position size and having a smaller position in the opposite direction allows you to cover your bases if the trade moves against you. If it doesn’t move against you and ends up going long as originally intended, you are not to lose any money, likely a small profit or break even when all is said and done.
In order to give the hedges a greater change of hitting, the take profits are smaller than a normal trade, this way even if your hedge wasn’t necessary and the original trade does not move against you, it's likely that your hedge will still win, and you can just consider it a small scalp to further your profits on the original trade.
Doubles:
Besides minimizing loss, we also aim to maximize the potential gain. When a second signal prints off in the direction of the trade you are currently already in, the tool directs you to double your position size.
The signal for doubling is a label with “2x” written inside.
The logic here is similar to hedging but in the opposite way. Just as a signal in the opposite direction creates uncertainty, a signal in the same direction indicates more certainty hence doubling your position size.
Example: If you are currently in a long position and you get a second long signal, you would then double your existing position since two long signals printing off before the first one has a chance to play out indicates a stronger chance of movement in the intended direction of your trade.
User Inputs
Upon opening the tools settings tab, you will find all the user inputs which can then be modified to fit your desired strategy. In this section of our guides, you will find individual explanations and use cases for each input so you can correctly use them to your best advantage.
Strategy Tracker Table:
By ticking this input on, the strategy tracker table will be visible to the user. (Default is on)
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long:
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement on the timeframe of the market being observed, making a long position riskier.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Long:
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Long
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a long position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of longing as the market has started to pull back from a peak or when the market has just reached a peak.
Indicator 1 Less Than Input: Long
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at lower levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market has started to recover from a bottom or when the market has just reached a bottom.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market is currently in a strong uptrend.
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short
This grouping of inputs is best used as a filter of sorts, much like many of the other inputs which are also essentially filters of the market to find areas ripe for trade. Specifically, however, this group of inputs is especially powerful because if used correctly, it can specify a range for the average momentum to fall in when looking for either long or short trades. Think of it like a sweet spot where the average is not too high nor too low. In combination with the numerous other inputs which will shortly be explained, this sweet spot can be a great indication. Keep in mind that once you find a working range, this will not last forever. Conditions in the market are ever changing and as such your inputs, in this case the range the average momentum must fall in, will also need to change with the market conditions.
Bars Since Crossover:
This input simply describes a crossover of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when an upwards move might happen. The crossover correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired upwards move. This confirmation is a crossover of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossover is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossover of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossover input is set to 10. This means that the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a long position.
Bars Since Crossunder:
This input simply describes a crossunder of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when a downwards move might happen. The crossunder correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired downwards move. This confirmation is a crossunder of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossunder is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossunder of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossunder input is set to 10. This means that the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a short position.
Summary of Input Group: Bars Since Crossover/Crossunder
These two inputs can have a large effect on the types of trades being taken and the risk which your strategy opens up to. The idea is that in order for the two key factors described in How does it work? to be correlated and therefore indicate a strong directional move, the two events must happen within a somewhat small period of time. If the period of time between the two events taking place is too large, then it's riskier for your strategy due to a delay in directional momentum and the necessary confirmation. It's important to note that this “small period of time” is relative to the security you're trading and the timeframe its being trades on. Small could mean 5 bars in some cases or 20 bars in others, this is why our custom back tester exists. So that the process of optimization on different securities and different timeframes is smooth and only requires adjustments to inputs then your own analysis of the back test results.
Indicator 1 Input Long
Defines how strong the upwards momentum needs to be in order to take a long position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a long position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close above following the crossover of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Long set to 50, this means that when the momentum crosses over its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossover the momentum must be above the level 50 in order for this condition to be met to take a long position.
The higher the level, the stronger the upwards momentum must be, and therefore by using higher levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Indicator 1 Input Short
Defines how strong the downwards momentum needs to be in order to take a short position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a short position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close below following the crossunder of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Short set to 40, this means that when the momentum crosses under its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossunder the momentum must be below the level 40 in order for this condition to be met to take a short position.
The lower the level, the stronger the downwards momentum must be, and therefore by using lower levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Input Long/Short
These two inputs are so important to your strategy because at the end of the day no matter how you set it up, it's still a momentum-based strategy. With that being said the level of momentum or the strength needed in order to take trades is of course going to be a key decider in the successfulness of the strategy. When optimizing these two inputs make sure to take into account what the overall market conditions are, meaning if it’s a bull market maybe make the momentum needed to take a long slightly less comparatively to the amount needed to take a short, in other words make long conditions less specific and short conditions more specific. Slight variations of this input can have very big effects, even changing it by 1 or 2 can make a major difference. In might even be good to consider starting optimization with these inputs and then work the rest of the strategy out from there. A lot could be said about these inputs and more docs will be added in order to further explain more strategy approaches revolving around them, for now don’t hesitate to ask any questions.
Indicator 2 Red
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses over it following the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a long position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Red states a condition in order for the script to take a long position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossover of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been red.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossover must also be red. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red this would indicate that a top was just reached, and price is reversing downwards making this not a good area to take a long.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a long
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was red and it's currently red this would indicate a more prolonged pullback.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been pulling back, now we can enter a long with more knowledge pointing to price reversing upwards from a downwards trend, or continuing its upwards trend after a pullback.
Indicator 2 Green
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses under it following the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a short position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Green states a condition in order for the script to take a short position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossunder of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been green.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossunder must also be green. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green this would indicate that a bottom was just reached, and price is reversing upwards making this not a good area to take a short.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a short.
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was green and it's currently green this would indicate a more prolonged upwards movement.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been moving up, now we can enter a short with more knowledge pointing to price reversing downwards from an upwards trend, or continuing its downwards trend after a bounce up.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 2 Red/Green
Similar to Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short, the goal of these inputs is to try to get a picture of what the previous recent market has been doing. By getting this picture it's easier to find different areas of the market more ideal for trades. Different from Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short though, Indicator 2 Red/Green is directly correlated to the price action in the market rather than the momentum. By switching these on or off you are setting more or less specific conditions for taking trades. Some markets require this extra condition to lower your risk in your strategy, however others may not.
Pivot Low
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot low when taking a long position.
This pivot low is then used to set the stop loss when entering a long position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot low based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot low.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a long signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot Low 2
Pivot low 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot Low Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot low to be, if the pivot low does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot Low 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot Low input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot Low input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot Low 2 is used.
Pivot Low 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot Low’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot High
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot high when taking a short position.
This pivot high is then used to set the stop loss when entering a short position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot high based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot high.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a short signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot High 2
Pivot high 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot High Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot high to be, if the pivot high does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot High 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot High input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot High input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot High 2 is used.
Pivot High 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot High’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot low can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot low that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a long position, making sure the pivot low isn’t too far down is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot Low Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a long position, when searching for the pivot low in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot low is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot high can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot high that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a short position, making sure the pivot high isn’t too far up is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot High Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a short position, when searching for the pivot high in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot high is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot Low Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot low, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot Low Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot low that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot Low 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot low and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot low and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% below your long entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% above your long entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot Low Minimum.
Pivot High Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot high, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot High Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot high that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot High 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot high and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot high and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% above your short entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% below your short entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot High Minimum.
Summary of Input Group: Pivot Low/High - Pivot Low/High 2 – Pivot Low/High Risk Tolerance – Pivot Low/High Minimum
The first key takeaway from all these inputs is that your stop losses and take profits will be directly affected through optimizing any of them. The second key takeaway is that these inputs are crucial in managing the risk in your strategy, and while this has been said many times throughout the guide for various inputs, when it comes to stop losses and take profits it is especially true. Having a stop loss which is too high opens up the possibility for much bigger losses, and as a result your take profits will also be too high, minimizing the chance of any of them being hit. Having a stop loss which is too low increases the chance that your trade will get stopped out preemptively, before the trade can mature and move in your favor because remember that trades will not always move immediately in the intended direction, a good amount of patience is often involved in creating consistent successful trades and a successful strategy as such. On the same note, too low of a stop loss could also mean you are missing out on unrealized profit since your take profits are a direct result of the stop loss which is found. When optimizing your pivot low/high risk tolerance, think not about how much you are willing to lose on a single trade, but how much your portfolio can actually afford to lose not just on a single trade but multiple trades, sometimes even in a row. Obviously, the goal in creating a strategy is that you avoid losing trades and especially multiple in a row, however, there are many things that can’t be accounted for. The only way to manage this unaccounted risk is to use proper risk management and not open yourself up to big losses even in the worst most unlikely scenarios. Even if you don’t lose multiple trades in a row, ask yourself, could I afford to lose multiple trades with the risk tolerance I have set if everything were to go to $hit, (hopefully it would not), but in the off chance it did, instead of beating yourself up over what you did wrong, you’ll be patting yourself on the back for what you did right.
TP2-4 Long Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% below your long entry, your first take profit will be 2% above your long entry, hence 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Long Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% above our long entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% below long entry. TP2 Long Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Long Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Long Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Long Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your long, your stop loss will automatically move up to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved up in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere below TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere below TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your long position, but the trade does not continue upwards and moves down to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just below each corresponding take profit for long trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue upwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight up but rather have a series of small pullbacks throughout the more general upwards trend.
Note that when a long trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot low which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot low.
TP2-4 Short Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% above your short entry, your first take profit will be 2% below your short entry, hence, 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Short Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% below our short entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% above short entry. TP2 Short Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Short Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Short Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Short Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your short, your stop loss will automatically move down to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved down in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere above TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere above TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your short position, but the trade does not continue downwards and moves up to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just above each corresponding take profit for short trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue downwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight down but rather have a series of small bounces throughout the more general downwards trend.
Note that when a short trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot high which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot high.
Summary of Take Profit/Stop Loss Placement:
Correctly placed take profits and stop losses are essential in having a successful strategy and proper risk management. With that being said there are also many ways in which to use this system. Deciding how to set them up is really just a matter of determining the trading style you aim to succeed with. Once this has been determined, the placement of take profits and stop losses should be easier to configure. However, if there is any confusion on either of these topics as the ratios and corresponding TP/SL can get confusing, please do not hesitate to ask further questions in our discord!
Leverage Long
Leverage Long input simply defines the leverage used in your long positions, and is used in calculating the profit in Strategy Tracker
A rundown of risk associated with using leverage will not be given here since it should assume that if you're using leverage, you should already understand the risks.
If you are not using any leverage, then set Leverage Long input to 1.
Long Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your long trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Long Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of long hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Long Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Long Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double long.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Long Position Size should always be double your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Short Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your short trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Short Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of short hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Short Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Short Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double short.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Short Position Size should always be double your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
A Message From the Developer PLEASE READ!!!
If you have made it this far in the guide, I applaud you and thank you for sticking with it as I know there is a lot of information here! This is not an exaggeration when I say there are hundreds of millions of possible variations that could be applied throughout all the inputs which is why I much prefer to call this a tool rather than an algorithm. Algorithm is a loaded word in my opinion as it comes with an implication of guarantee in the trades being made. This is not meant to discourage anybody from taking trades based off the tool which is also why I provided the option for automated alerts which through third party software can turn into automated trades; if you have the confidence in your strategy by all means I encourage you to trade it, automated or not. Just please understand that it's highly recommended to also apply your own knowledge and analysis before taking a trade as historical back testing data has its limitations and cannot always account for current market conditions. The real applicability does not fall in what the back tester window is saying you would have made or how accurate your strategy would have been, it's within the sheer number of markets and scenarios this tool can be used in and the information you can get which a human just can’t comprehend all at once; its literally endless. I urge all of you to be creative and think outside the box about what you can do with such a powerful tool at your fingertips. After all this is the reason why so many inputs were provided. Another main goal of this project was to give users a better understanding of risk management. It can be hard to manage your risk when it’s all kept in your head, but when you can modify your strategy to better manage your risk by simply optimizing a few inputs, it’s a lot easier to comprehend and actually apply when trading. The last thing I want to say is have fun working through the possible learning curve in using this tool, it may be a process but enjoy it because the one thing I can guarantee is that you will come out the other side a better trader than before!
Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy [Kioseff Trading]Hello!
Introducing the Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy.
The indicator tests up to 800 RSI strategies simultaneously, looping through arrays, and auto plots the best performing parameter set.
The image above shows the result of 800 RSI strategies concurrently.
The table oriented bottom right shows the performance and risk metrics of the best performing RSI system tested across the bar set. Additionally, the conditions for entry and exit are displayed; for the image - a long entry system predicated on RSI crossunders and exit system predicated on a 1% TP and 2% SL are shown.
The indicator calculates numerous risk and performance metrics.
Calculated metrics include:
RSI Parameters
RSI Cross Entry Level
Total Trades
Win Rate
Avg. Gain for Winning Trades
Max Pain
PnL (Cumulative Performance)
Profit Factor
Avg. Loss for Losing Trades
Ratio Avg. Win / Avg. Loss
Avg. Bars in Trade
Max Drawdown
Current Drawdown
Open Position PnL
"Dynamic" indicates the performance of self-optimizing RSI system was tested.
The image above shows the performance of the greatest-performing RSI system - a fixed set of parameters - when adhering to a 1% TP and 2% fixed SL.
Trailing Stops and Profit-Taking Limit orders can be set/simulated.
The image above shows a dynamic entry level - plotted as a purple, non-transparent line.
The entry level "self-optimizes" to mimic the best performing RSI system at current time.
The image above exemplifies the functionality for all horizontal lines plotted on the chart.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a profitable trade is shown.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a losing trade is shown.
The entry level for RSI crossunders/crossovers is shown.
The image above show the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator recording entries & exits; gains & losses, for each executed trade.
You can "verify" trades manually.
Blue boxes reflect an entered position.
Green boxes reflect a closed, profitable trade.
Red boxes reflect a close, losing trade.
The percentage gain for a profitable trade is appended to green boxes; the percentage loss for a losing trade is appended to red boxes.
The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator plots off the chart; however, percentage gains/losses are measured against price, not RSI.
Boxes correlate to the interval a trade was entered/exited on.
The indicator hosts various methods to filter the outcome for testing.
For instance, you can:
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
Configure the RSI settings that are tested (i.e. RSI 2 - 9, RSI 14 - 20, RSI 50 - 57)
Test short-based RSI Systems and long-based RSI systems
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
Adjust PT and SL percentages.
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
The image above shows results for 800 short-based RSI systems - using a trailing stop loss.
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
The image shows results for 800 long-based RSI systems. Positions are entered subsequent to RSI crossovers.
You can select which RSI strategies are tested - you aren't not limited to testing RSI 2 - RSI 9 (:
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the profit target being exceeded.
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the stop loss being exceeded.
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
The image above shows an RSI EMA in addition to prerequisite condition. For each RSI strategy tested, the RSI used for the strategy must measure above an EMA of its values prior to entry. You can require RSI to measure below an EMA of its values prior to entry, use an SMA, and change the length of the MA used.
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
The image above shows me requiring the ADX indicator to measure above "20" prior to long entry. Any of the built-indicators can be used with similar conditions; you can implement a custom-coded indicator for trade logic.
Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator.
The image above shows me retrieving the value for Volume Profile Point of Control - a TradingView coded indicator.
Consequently, I can require price to measure above/below the session's Poc prior to RSI long/short entry.
You can use this feature with any custom coded indicator providing historical plot values - something you or a favored author have coded.
]Adjust PT and SL percentages
The image above shows adjusted TP & SL percentages - optimize and reward/risk ratio you'd like (:
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
The image above shows manually plotted RSI parameters and a corresponding stat sheet.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
The image above shows me requiring the ticker "$VIX" to measure below $30 prior to long/short entry. If %VIS measures greater than $30 when a long/short signal triggers a position will not be opened. Further refine your trading system with this feature - exploit correlations.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
The image above shows configurable start and end dates for the optimization period.
You won't be able to test 800 RSI strategies concomitantly on a 20,000 bar data set.
Consequently, for large data sets (intrasession data) you will have to narrow the optimization window to test a larger number of combinations.
You can test 80 (loads on all data sets), 144 (loads on all data sets), 264 (loads on ~15,000 bar data sets), 312 (loads on ~11,500 bar data sets) and 800 (loads on ~4950 bar data sets)combinations simultaneously. You can test 800 RSI strategies simultaneously on intrasession data; however, you'll likely have to narrow the tested time window.
I recently published a bar count script titled "Bar Count for Backtesting", you can access the script here:
The above script is useful for quickly calculating the number of bars in a time window, or the date for a bar that is "x" number of bars back. Therefore, implementing these scripts cooperatively should improve date selection efficiency (not arbitrarily selecting test start & end dates that fail to load).
I included a tool tip describing the near-maximum bars in a data set that the higher numbers of simultaneous RSI strategies can be tested on.
More to come; enjoy!
(P.S. The script uses private libraries and, consequently, is unable to be published open source)
An optimization script is best implemented to discover what won't work, not what will work. The best performing "optimized" parameters are not a guaranteed profitable investment system. While we may see an exceptionally positive performance for a set of parameters, it's impossible to know how much of that performance is the beneficiary of market noise in the absence of additional testing. Most market moves are noise - irreplicable sequences that offer no predictive utility - and most "good" backtests overwhelmingly benefit from these irreplicable sequences. An investor unfamiliar with this concept may be lead to believe they have found a valid correlation between an indicator sequence and subsequent price movement, despite the correlation being illusory.
Consequently, it should be assumed that the best performing parameters strongly benefitted from market noise and will not work in a live market - until further rigorous statistical tests are performed on an investment system built around the best performing parameters. This includes out-of-sample, in-sample, and forward testing in addition to testing negatively correlated, positively correlated and zero-correlation assets; testing additional assets should be treated as prerequisite to live implementation.
Of course, all trading strategies, even one's that methodically exploit a valid correlation/replicable sequence, will benefit from market noise - it's impossible to avoid. However, a "legit" trading strategy has a chance to work on future price data, while an overoptimized strategy will fail miserably on new price data!
An overoptimized strategy is virtually guaranteed to have a better backtest performance than a valid strategy. The overoptimized strategy will fail in a live market while the valid strategy has a chance of working. So, should you notice the best performing RSI parameters, be sure to build a comprehensive trading system around the parameters and perform additional tests. This is the only way to know if the optimized parameters will truly work in a live market!
Unfortunately, they often will not!
This publication does not constitute investment advice.
SNIPER ORB V3# 🎯 SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET
## Quick Reference Guide for Live Trading
---
## 📊 VISUAL IDENTIFICATION GUIDE
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
YOUR CHART AT A GLANCE
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
🔵 BRIGHT BLUE LINES (3px) → 5min ORB High/Low
🔷 CYAN LINES (2px) → 15min ORB High/Low
🟣 PURPLE LINES (2px) → 30min ORB High/Low (PRIMARY)
🟢 GREEN DASHED LINES (1px) → Upside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🔴 RED DASHED LINES (1px) → Downside targets (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
🟡 GOLD LINE (2px) → Anchored VWAP (9:30 AM anchor for NY, 3:00 AM for London)
📋 INFO TABLE (top-right) → Shows live ORB ranges, VWAP price, status
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
**KEY DIFFERENCE FROM OTHER ORB INDICATORS:**
- You see **ALL 3 ORB PERIODS SIMULTANEOUSLY** (5min, 15min, 30min)
- Targets calculated from **30min ORB ONLY** (not 5min or 15min)
- **NO BOX FILLS** - clean line-only display for sniper precision
- Auto-disappears at session end (no clutter from old sessions)
---
## 🔘 NEW FEATURE: ORB DISPLAY TOGGLES
**You now have FULL CONTROL over which ORB periods to display!**
```
In indicator settings → "ORB Display" section:
☑ Show 5min ORB → Toggle blue lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 15min ORB → Toggle cyan lines ON/OFF
☑ Show 30min ORB → Toggle purple lines ON/OFF
USE CASES:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
1. FOCUS MODE (30min only)
☐ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Clean chart, just your primary trading range
→ Best for beginners or minimalist traders
2. EARLY WARNING MODE (5min + 30min)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☑ 30min
→ See early breaks with 5min, trade 30min confirmation
→ Reduces visual noise from 15min
3. CONFLUENCE MODE (all 3 ORBs)
☑ 5min ☑ 15min ☑ 30min
→ Maximum information, all alignment signals
→ For advanced traders seeking highest probability
4. INTRADAY SCALP MODE (5min only)
☑ 5min ☐ 15min ☐ 30min
→ Ultra-fast entries on 5min breaks
→ High-risk, high-frequency approach
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
💡 PRO TIP: Start with 30min only, then add 5min/15min as you gain experience
```
---
## 🎯 FIXED: ANCHORED VWAP (TIMESTAMP-BASED)
**The VWAP now anchors with SURGICAL PRECISION to the exact session start candle!**
```
LONDON SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 3:00 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 3 AND minute == 0
• Resets every morning at London Open
NEW YORK SESSION:
• Anchors at the EXACT 9:30 AM ET candle
• Uses timestamp checking: hour == 9 AND minute == 30
• Resets every day at NY Open
WHAT THIS MEANS:
✅ VWAP starts accumulating from the first tick of the session
✅ No more "off by one bar" errors
✅ Institutional-grade VWAP anchoring
✅ Perfect alignment with your ORB start times
HOW TO VERIFY IT'S WORKING:
1. Load indicator on 1min or 5min chart
2. Find the exact 9:30 AM candle (NY) or 3:00 AM candle (London)
3. VWAP should START appearing from that exact bar
4. Not the bar before, not the bar after - THAT EXACT BAR
```
---
## ⏰ SESSION TIMING MATRIX
| Session | Start Time | 5min Complete | 15min Complete | 30min Complete | Session End |
|---------|-----------|---------------|----------------|----------------|-------------|
| **London** | 3:00 AM ET | 3:05 AM | 3:15 AM | 3:30 AM | 9:30 AM ET (disappears) |
| **New York** | 9:30 AM ET | 9:35 AM | 9:45 AM | 10:00 AM | 5:00 PM ET (disappears) |
**💡 GOLDEN RULES:**
1. **WAIT FOR 30MIN ORB TO COMPLETE** before trading targets (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
2. Use 5min and 15min ORBs as **early warning signals** only
3. All ORB lines + VWAP **auto-delete** at session end (clean chart)
---
## 🎯 THE 3-ORB SYSTEM: HOW IT WORKS
### **Hierarchical ORB Structure**
```
TIME: 9:30 AM ─────────────────────────────────> 10:00 AM ──────> 5:00 PM
↓ ↓
SESSION START 30min ORB COMPLETE
(all 3 ORBs begin forming) (targets appear)
📍 5min ORB (9:30-9:35 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: EARLY breakout signal, fastest-moving boundary
📍 15min ORB (9:30-9:45 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: MID-TERM institutional reference level
📍 30min ORB (9:30-10:00 AM): ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━>
Purpose: PRIMARY TRADING RANGE - all targets calculated from this
🎯 TARGETS (10:00 AM onward): ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ (1x, 2x, 3x from 30min ORB)
Purpose: Profit-taking levels based on 30min range
```
**Why 3 ORBs Instead of 1?**
- **5min ORB**: Captures early institutional positioning (first 5 minutes)
- **15min ORB**: Confirms directional bias (more stable than 5min)
- **30min ORB**: Full market digestion of overnight news + opening orders
- **Confluence = Higher Win Rate**: When all 3 align, breakouts are extremely reliable
---
## 🎯 THE 5 HIGH-PROBABILITY SETUPS
### **SETUP #1: TRIPLE ORB BREAKOUT CONFLUENCE** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
✅ Price breaks ALL 3 ORBs simultaneously:
• 5min high/low (blue line)
• 15min high/low (cyan line)
• 30min high/low (purple line)
✅ VWAP confirms direction (below price = bullish, above = bearish)
✅ Volume spike on breakout candle
ENTRY: Close of breakout candle (must close beyond ALL 3 ORBs)
STOP: Inside 30min ORB at 30m low (long) or 30m high (short)
TARGET 1: First green/red dashed line (0.5x 30m range)
TARGET 2: Second target (1x 30m range)
TARGET 3: Third target (1.5x 30m range)
WIN RATE: 75-85% | R:R = 1:2.5 minimum
NOTES: When all 3 ORBs align, institutional order flow is unanimous
```
---
### **SETUP #2: 5MIN EARLY BREAKOUT → 30MIN CONFIRMATION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB first (blue line crossed)
✅ 15min ORB holds initially (cyan line not crossed yet)
✅ After 30min ORB completes, price breaks 30min boundary (purple)
✅ VWAP alignment confirms direction
✅ All 3 ORBs now broken in same direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks (purple line) + 5min/15min already broken
STOP: 30min ORB opposite boundary
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets from 30min ORB
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:2+
NOTES: 5min gave early warning, 30min confirms institutional commitment
```
---
### **SETUP #3: FALSE 5MIN BREAKOUT → 30MIN REVERSAL** ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price breaks 5min ORB (blue line)
✅ Fails to break 15min or 30min ORBs (cyan/purple lines hold)
✅ Price reverses back inside 5min ORB
✅ Then breaks OPPOSITE side of 30min ORB (purple line)
✅ VWAP flips to confirm new direction
ENTRY: When 30min ORB breaks in OPPOSITE direction of failed 5min break
STOP: Failed 5min breakout high/low (now a liquidity grab zone)
TARGET 1-3: Standard targets
WIN RATE: 80-90% | R:R = 1:3+ (trapped traders forced to exit)
NOTES: Most profitable setup - 5min breakout was liquidity hunt
```
---
### **SETUP #4: TIGHT COMPRESSION → EXPLOSION** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ All 3 ORBs tightly overlapping (5m, 15m, 30m within 50 points on YM)
✅ Range < 0.3% of price (very tight consolidation)
✅ VWAP sitting in middle of compression
✅ 30min ORB complete, price still inside all 3
ENTRY: Simultaneous break of ALL 3 ORBs + VWAP cross
STOP: Middle of compression zone
TARGET: 2x-4x normal targets (volatility expansion)
WIN RATE: 65-75% | R:R = 1:5+ (explosive breakout)
NOTES: Low volatility → high volatility shift, institutions coiling spring
```
---
### **SETUP #5: VWAP BOUNCE WITHIN 30MIN ORB** ⭐⭐⭐⭐
```
CONDITIONS:
✅ Price stayed inside 30min ORB for 1+ hours post-formation
✅ VWAP acting as dynamic support (long) or resistance (short)
✅ Price bouncing between VWAP and 30min ORB boundaries
✅ Clear rejection candles at VWAP
ENTRY: When price bounces off VWAP toward 30min ORB boundary
• Long: VWAP bounce up toward 30m high (purple)
• Short: VWAP rejection down toward 30m low (purple)
STOP: Beyond VWAP by 20 points
TARGET: 30min ORB opposite boundary
WIN RATE: 70-80% | R:R = 1:1.5-2
NOTES: Range-bound play, NOT for breakout traders
```
---
## 🛡️ RISK MANAGEMENT RULES
### **Position Sizing by ORB Range**
```
30min ORB Range | Stop Distance | Risk $500 (1%) | YM Contracts
-----------------|------------------|-----------------|-------------
< 50 points | 50 pts | $500 ÷ $250 = | 2 contracts
50-100 points | 100 pts | $500 ÷ $500 = | 1 contract
100-150 points | 150 pts | $500 ÷ $750 = | 0.66 (use 1)
150-200 points | 200 pts | $500 ÷ $1000 = | 0.5 (use 1)
> 200 points | Don't trade | Too wide | Skip setup
Formula: Risk $ ÷ (Stop Distance × $5 per YM point) = Max Contracts
```
### **The 3-Strike Rule (MANDATORY)**
```
✅ Trade 1: Full position size (based on 30m ORB range)
❌ Stop hit → Trade 2: HALF position size
❌ Stop hit → Trade 3: QUARTER position size
❌ Stop hit → DONE FOR THE DAY (no exceptions)
```
### **Profit Taking Ladder**
```
TARGET 1 (0.5x 30m range): Take 50% off, move stop to breakeven
TARGET 2 (1.0x 30m range): Take 30% off, trail stop by 25 points
TARGET 3 (1.5x 30m range): Take 15% off, let 5% run with 50pt trail
```
---
## ⚠️ DO NOT TRADE IF...
```
🚫 30min ORB incomplete (< 10:00 AM NY / < 3:30 AM London)
🚫 30min ORB range < 40 points YM (too tight, likely chop)
🚫 30min ORB range > 250 points YM (too wide, unpredictable)
🚫 All 3 ORBs wildly divergent (5m=100pts, 15m=180pts, 30m=240pts)
🚫 Major news release within 30 minutes (wait for ORB to reform)
🚫 You've hit 3 losses in the session (3-strike rule)
🚫 You're tired, emotional, revenge trading, or distracted
🚫 Time > 12:00 PM ET (lunch, avoid until 1:00 PM)
🚫 Time > 3:00 PM ET unless Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM) momentum
```
---
## 🔍 PRE-SESSION CHECKLIST
**15 Minutes Before London (2:45 AM ET) or NY (9:15 AM ET):**
```
□ Check economic calendar (FOMC? NFP? CPI? → extra caution)
□ Review previous session's ORB ranges (context for today's volatility)
□ Load SNIPER ORB on 1min or 5min chart
□ Select correct session: "London" or "New York"
□ Verify indicator settings:
• Number of Targets: 3
• Target % of 30min Range: 50%
• Show Anchored VWAP: ON
□ Set TradingView alerts:
• 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM or 3:30 AM)
• Price crossing 30min high/low
• VWAP crosses
□ Prepare bracket orders mentally (entry, stop, 3 targets)
□ Review yesterday's P&L and lessons learned
□ Set phone to "Do Not Disturb" mode
```
---
## 🎨 INDICATOR SETTINGS GUIDE
### **Core Settings (Updated with Toggles)**
```
SESSION SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Active Session: "London" or "New York"
ORB DISPLAY (NEW!):
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show 5min ORB (toggle blue lines)
☑ Show 15min ORB (toggle cyan lines)
☑ Show 30min ORB (toggle purple lines)
💡 Turn OFF any ORB to declutter your chart!
TARGET SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
• Number of Targets: 3 (default)
• Target % of 30min Range: 50% (default)
VWAP SETTINGS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
☑ Show Anchored VWAP
• VWAP Color: Gold (#FFC107)
• VWAP Width: 2px
```
### **Color Customization (Optimized for Dark Charts)**
```
DEFAULT COLORS:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
5min ORB: Bright Blue (#2196F3) - 3px wide
15min ORB: Cyan (#00BCD4) - 2px wide
30min ORB: Purple (#9C27B0) - 2px wide
Upside Targets: Green (#4CAF50) - 1px dashed
Downside Targets: Red (#F44336) - 1px dashed
VWAP: Gold (#FFC107) - 2px solid
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
WHY THESE COLORS?
• Blue family (5m/15m) = short-term, high-frequency
• Purple (30m) = primary, institutional level
• Green/Red = universal up/down
• Gold VWAP = fair value anchor (stands out)
```
### **Settings by Trading Style**
**BEGINNER (Clean & Simple):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (30min only - focus mode)
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute
```
**SCALPER (5-15 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB (early signals)
☐ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (confirmation)
Number of Targets: 5
Target % of 30min Range: 30-40%
Label Size: Tiny
Chart Timeframe: 1-minute
```
**DAY TRADER (30-90 min holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☑ Show 5min ORB
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB (all 3 - confluence mode)
Number of Targets: 3
Target % of 30min Range: 50%
Label Size: Small
Chart Timeframe: 5-minute (RECOMMENDED)
```
**SWING TRADER (2-4 hour holds):**
```
ORB Display:
☐ Show 5min ORB (too noisy for swings)
☑ Show 15min ORB
☑ Show 30min ORB
Number of Targets: 2-3
Target % of 30min Range: 75-100%
Label Size: Normal
Chart Timeframe: 15-minute
```
---
## 📈 TIMEFRAME SELECTION GUIDE
| Your Timeframe | What You See | Best For |
|---------------|--------------|----------|
| **1-minute** | Every tick, high noise | Scalping, precision entries |
| **5-minute** | Balanced clarity | Day trading (RECOMMENDED) |
| **15-minute** | Clean structure | Swing positions |
| **30-minute** | Too compressed | Not recommended (can't see ORB form) |
**💡 PRO TIP:**
- **Primary chart: 5-minute** (for entries and monitoring)
- **Secondary chart: 1-minute** (for precise timing)
- **Never go above 15-minute** (ORBs won't form properly)
---
## 🧠 READING THE 3-ORB STRUCTURE
### **Bullish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Staircase Expansion"
5min: ━━━━ (tight, 60 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━ (wider, 90 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━ (widest, 120 pts)
→ Bullish expansion, expect upside breakout
PATTERN 2: "Nested Compression"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━ (35 pts)
30min: ━━━━ (40 pts)
→ All tight, explosive breakout likely
PATTERN 3: "Early Commitment"
5min: ━━━━━━ (100 pts, already broken up)
15min: ━━━━━ (80 pts, holding)
30min: ━━━━━ (110 pts, about to break)
→ 5min led the way, 30min confirmation coming
```
### **Bearish Alignment Patterns**
```
PATTERN 1: "Waterfall Setup"
5min: ━━━━ (50 pts, broke down)
15min: ━━━━━ (70 pts, broke down)
30min: ━━━━━━ (90 pts, about to break)
→ Sequential breakdown, strong bearish momentum
PATTERN 2: "Failed Highs"
5min: ━━━━━━ (upper wick rejections)
15min: ━━━━━━ (couldn't break)
30min: ━━━━━━━ (topped out)
→ All 3 rejecting highs, bearish reversal likely
```
### **Neutral/Chop Patterns (AVOID TRADING)**
```
PATTERN 1: "Wide Divergence"
5min: ━━ (30 pts)
15min: ━━━━━━━ (120 pts)
30min: ━━━━━━━━━━━ (200 pts)
→ No consensus, unpredictable, skip
PATTERN 2: "Whipsaw City"
• Price breaking 5min up, then down, then up again
• 15min and 30min not aligned
• VWAP getting crossed every 5 minutes
→ Chop day, step aside, wait for clarity
```
---
## 📊 INTEGRATION WITH YM ULTIMATE SNIPER v8.1
**The 2-System Confluence Method:**
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 1: SNIPER ORB → Defines "Zones That Matter" │
│ • 30min ORB = primary institutional range │
│ • VWAP = fair value anchor │
│ • Targets = profit zones │
│ • 5min/15min = early warning signals │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 2: YM ULTIMATE SNIPER → Triggers precise entry │
│ • Wait for GOD MODE signal AT 30min ORB boundary │
│ • 6-gate filter: Score ≥9, fat body ≥70%, delta ≥70% │
│ • Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥7 │
│ • Intrabar pressure consistent throughout formation │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
↓
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ STEP 3: EXECUTE TRADE │
│ • ORB breakout + GOD MODE = MAXIMUM PROBABILITY │
│ • Enter ONLY when BOTH systems align │
│ • This is TRUE "sniper" trading (2-5 trades/day max) │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
**Confluence Scoring for Combined System:**
```
SNIPER ORB Criteria:
□ 30min ORB complete (10:00 AM+) +2 points
□ All 3 ORBs broken in same direction +2 points
□ VWAP alignment (below=bull, above=bear) +1 point
□ Volume spike on breakout candle +1 point
□ Tight 3-ORB compression (<100pt divergence) +1 point
YM ULTIMATE SNIPER Criteria:
□ GOD MODE signal at ORB boundary +3 points
□ Score ≥9.0 (tier classification) +1 point
□ Candle Dominance Index (CDI) ≥8 +1 point
TOTAL POSSIBLE: 12 points
TRADE EXECUTION RULES:
• 10-12 points = MAX SIZE (this is the holy grail setup)
• 8-9 points = FULL SIZE (high probability)
• 6-7 points = HALF SIZE (moderate probability)
• <6 points = NO TRADE (wait for better alignment)
```
---
## 💡 COMMON MISTAKES & FIXES
```
❌ MISTAKE: Trading before 30min ORB completes
✅ FIX: Wait until 10:00 AM (NY) or 3:30 AM (London), NO EXCEPTIONS
❌ MISTAKE: Ignoring 5min and 15min ORBs (only watching 30min)
✅ FIX: Use all 3 for confluence - they're your early warning system
❌ MISTAKE: Chasing breakouts 100+ points beyond 30min ORB
✅ FIX: Wait for pullback to VWAP or 30min boundary for re-entry
❌ MISTAKE: Not adjusting target % for market conditions
✅ FIX: Volatile day (ORB >200pts)? Use 75-100% targets
Calm day (ORB <80pts)? Use 30-40% targets
❌ MISTAKE: Trading when all 3 ORBs are wildly different sizes
✅ FIX: Skip the day if 5m/15m/30m diverge by >100pts - no consensus
❌ MISTAKE: Forgetting VWAP position
✅ FIX: VWAP MUST confirm bias:
• Long: price > VWAP
• Short: price < VWAP
• If VWAP contradicts, skip the trade
❌ MISTAKE: Not respecting the 3-strike rule
✅ FIX: 3 losses = DONE for the session, no rationalization
❌ MISTAKE: Trading during lunch (12:00-1:00 PM ET)
✅ FIX: Volume dies, ORBs lose relevance, false signals increase
```
---
## 🔔 ALERT SETUP (ESSENTIAL)
**TradingView Alerts You MUST Set:**
```
ALERT 1: "30min ORB Complete"
• Type: Time-based
• Trigger: 10:00 AM ET (NY) or 3:30 AM ET (London)
• Message: "🎯 30min ORB complete - targets now active"
ALERT 2: "30min ORB High Breakout"
• Type: Crossing Up
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB High (purple line)
• Message: "🚀 30m ORB HIGH broken - check for long setup"
ALERT 3: "30min ORB Low Breakdown"
• Type: Crossing Down
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: 30min ORB Low (purple line)
• Message: "📉 30m ORB LOW broken - check for short setup"
ALERT 4: "VWAP Cross"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: Close
• Value 2: VWAP
• Message: "⚡ VWAP crossed - check institutional bias shift"
ALERT 5: "Target 1 Hit"
• Type: Crossing
• Value 1: High (for longs) or Low (for shorts)
• Value 2: First target line
• Message: "🎯 Target 1 hit - take 50% off, move stop to BE"
```
---
## 📱 MOBILE TRADING WORKFLOW
**TradingView Mobile App Setup:**
```
1. SAVE LAYOUT
• Chart: 5-minute timeframe
• SNIPER ORB indicator loaded
• YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (if using)
• Save as "SNIPER ORB - YM"
2. ENABLE NOTIFICATIONS
• Settings → Notifications → Push Alerts: ON
• All 5 alerts above configured
3. QUICK ACCESS
• Add YM futures to Watchlist: "MYM" or "YM1!"
• Pin SNIPER ORB layout to favorites
4. EXECUTION READY
• Broker app (TastyTrade, NinjaTrader, etc.) logged in
• Preset bracket orders:
- Entry: market order
- Stop: 30m ORB opposite boundary
- Targets: 3 levels (50%, 30%, 20% of position)
5. BATTERY & CONNECTIVITY
• Phone charged 100% before session
• Stable WiFi or LTE connection
• Backup power bank available
```
---
## 🎓 DAILY PERFORMANCE JOURNAL
**After Each Trading Session (MANDATORY):**
```
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
DATE: __________ SESSION: □ London □ New York
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
ORB DATA:
• 5min ORB Range: ______ points
• 15min ORB Range: ______ points
• 30min ORB Range: ______ points
• Alignment: □ Tight □ Moderate □ Wide (skip if wide)
VWAP BEHAVIOR:
• Opening position: □ Above price □ Below price □ Mixed
• Did VWAP act as support/resistance? □ Yes □ No
TRADES TAKEN:
Total Setups Identified: _____
Trades Executed: _____
Win/Loss Record: _____ W / _____ L
Win Rate: _____%
Gross P&L: $_______
Net P&L (after commissions): $_______
BEST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________ (which of the 5 setups?)
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Profit: $_______
• What went RIGHT: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
WORST TRADE:
• Setup: ____________________
• Entry Price: ______ Exit Price: ______
• Loss: $_______
• What went WRONG: _________________________________
_________________________________________________
• Lesson Learned: ___________________________________
3-STRIKE RULE STATUS:
□ No losses (great day)
□ 1 loss (still in game)
□ 2 losses (caution, half size)
□ 3 losses (stopped for day, as required)
TOMORROW'S ADJUSTMENTS:
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
□ _________________________________________________
EMOTIONAL STATE TODAY:
□ Calm & focused (optimal)
□ Anxious/rushed (need to work on patience)
□ Overconfident (dial back position size)
□ Fearful (review winning trades to build confidence)
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
```
---
## 🚀 YOUR FIRST LIVE TRADE WALKTHROUGH
**Step-by-Step for New York Session (Most Common):**
```
⏰ 9:15 AM ET - PREPARATION
□ Load SNIPER ORB on YM 5-minute chart
□ Select "New York" session in indicator settings
□ Verify VWAP is showing (gold line)
□ Check economic calendar (any big news at 9:30?)
□ Prepare mentally: "I will wait for 30min ORB to complete"
⏰ 9:30 AM ET - SESSION OPENS
□ Watch 3 ORBs begin forming:
• Blue lines (5min) will lock in at 9:35 AM
• Cyan lines (15min) will lock in at 9:45 AM
• Purple lines (30min) will lock in at 10:00 AM
□ Observe VWAP anchoring at 9:30 AM candle
□ DO NOT TRADE YET - just observe
⏰ 9:35 AM - 5MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 5min high/low (blue lines locked)
□ Check info table: "5m Range = XX points"
□ If 5min ORB breaks early, note direction but DON'T ENTER
⏰ 9:45 AM - 15MIN ORB COMPLETE
□ Note 15min high/low (cyan lines locked)
□ Compare to 5min ORB: Aligned? Expanding?
□ Still waiting... patience pays
⏰ 10:00 AM - 30MIN ORB COMPLETE (TARGETS APPEAR!)
□ Purple lines locked (30m high/low)
□ Green/red dashed target lines appear automatically
□ Info table shows "Status: ✓ Complete"
□ NOW you can trade breakouts
⏰ 10:00 AM - 11:30 AM - TRADING WINDOW
□ Wait for price to break purple line (30m ORB high or low)
□ Confirm:
1. All 3 ORBs broken in same direction?
2. VWAP confirming (below=bullish, above=bearish)?
3. Volume spike visible?
4. YM SNIPER GOD MODE signal? (if using)
□ If all YES → ENTER TRADE:
• Market order at breakout close
• Stop at 30m ORB opposite boundary
• Targets at green/red dashed lines
⏰ TARGET MANAGEMENT
□ Price hits first target (1x) → Take 50% off, move stop to BE
□ Price hits second target (2x) → Take 30% off, trail stop
□ Price hits third target (3x) → Take 15% off, let 5% run
⏰ 12:00 PM - LUNCH (AVOID TRADING)
□ Volume dies down
□ ORBs become less relevant
□ Take a break, review morning trades
⏰ 1:00 PM - 3:00 PM - AFTERNOON SESSION
□ ORBs still valid but less reliable
□ Consider waiting for Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM)
⏰ 5:00 PM - SESSION END
□ All ORB lines disappear automatically
□ VWAP disappears automatically
□ Chart cleans itself - ready for tomorrow
□ Fill out daily journal
```
---
## 🏆 WINNING MINDSET AFFIRMATIONS
Read these BEFORE each trading session:
```
"I trade ORBs, not chaos. Structure gives me edge."
"3 high-quality trades beat 20 mediocre ones."
"The 30min ORB is my anchor. I wait for it. Every. Single. Time."
"When all 3 ORBs align, institutions are unified. I follow."
"VWAP is my institutional compass. I respect its guidance."
"3 strikes and I'm out. Discipline > Ego."
"I am a SNIPER, not a machine gunner. Precision wins."
"My edge is patience. Let the ORBs complete."
"I don't predict. I react to proven structure."
"One perfect setup is worth waiting all morning."
```
---
## 📞 TROUBLESHOOTING
**"ORB lines not showing on chart!"**
→ Check timeframe: Must be 1min-30min (not daily/weekly)
→ Verify session time: Must be during London (3AM-9:30AM) or NY (9:30AM-5PM)
→ Check indicator status: Should say "⏳ Forming" or "✓ Complete" in table
**"Targets not appearing!"**
→ 30min ORB must be complete (10:00 AM NY / 3:30 AM London)
→ Check "Number of Targets" setting (must be ≥1)
→ Verify "Target % of 30min Range" is set (default 50%)
**"VWAP disappeared!"**
→ Normal behavior: VWAP auto-deletes at session end (5PM NY / 9:30AM London)
→ Toggle "Show Anchored VWAP" OFF then ON to reset
→ Check if you're viewing chart outside session hours
**"All 3 ORBs look the same!"**
→ This is actually GOOD - means tight alignment (high-probability setup)
→ If they're diverging wildly (>100pts difference), that's a skip signal
**"Info table blocking my view!"**
→ Info table is in top-right corner by default
→ Drag it to a different position (TradingView allows moving)
→ Or minimize it by clicking the small arrow
**"Colors are hard to see on my chart!"**
→ Go to indicator settings:
• "5min ORB", "15min ORB", "30min ORB" color pickers
• "Upside Targets", "Downside Targets" color pickers
• Recommended: Use contrasting colors vs your chart background
---
## 📚 ADVANCED INTEGRATION TECHNIQUES
### **Combining with Market Profile**
```
• Use Volume Profile to identify Value Area High (VAH) and Low (VAL)
• If 30min ORB aligns with VAH/VAL → extra confluence
• POC (Point of Control) acts similar to VWAP
```
### **Combining with Cumulative Delta**
```
• Check if delta is positive on 30min ORB high break (bullish confirmation)
• Negative delta on low break confirms bearish institutional flow
• Your YM SNIPER already tracks this - use together!
```
### **Combining with Options Flow**
```
• Large call buying near 30min ORB high? Institutions positioning for breakout
• Large put buying near 30min ORB low? Smart money hedging/shorting
• Tools: Unusual Whales, Cheddar Flow, OptionStrat
```
---
## 🎯 FINAL PRE-LIVE CHECKLIST
**DO NOT GO LIVE UNTIL ALL CHECKED:**
```
□ Practiced on TradingView Replay for 2+ weeks
□ Can identify all 5 setups by pattern recognition
□ Understand why targets come from 30min ORB only
□ Know difference between 5min/15min/30min roles
□ Risk management rules memorized (position sizing, 3-strike)
□ YM Ultimate SNIPER v8.1 loaded (optional but recommended)
□ All 5 TradingView alerts configured
□ Broker platform tested with demo account
□ Stop/target orders can be placed in <10 seconds
□ Daily journal template prepared
□ Emotional state: calm, patient, focused
□ Account size: Minimum $10,000 recommended
□ Understand auto-disappear behavior (ORBs delete at session end)
□ Know NOT to trade before 30min ORB complete
□ Comfortable with looking at chart and seeing 6+ lines (3 ORBs + targets)
IF ALL CHECKED → YOU'RE READY TO SNIPE! 🎯
IF ANY UNCHECKED → KEEP PRACTICING, DON'T RUSH
```
---
## 💎 THE CORE PRINCIPLE
```
╔═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╗
║ ║
║ "The ORB doesn't predict the market. ║
║ The ORB reveals where institutions are positioned. ║
║ ║
║ When you see all 3 ORBs align and break, ║
║ you're not guessing direction— ║
║ you're following the billion-dollar order flow." ║
║ ║
║ THAT'S YOUR EDGE. ║
║ ║
╚═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╝
```
**🎯 Good luck, stay patient, and happy sniping! 🎯**
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
END OF SNIPER ORB TRADING CHEAT SHEET v3.0
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
In-Range Rolling SL
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and trade entry opportunities based on rolling price windows.
Core Concept
The indicator analyzes the highest high and lowest low over a defined lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish an "in-range" zone. When price stays within this range without breaking either boundary, it creates a squeeze condition—signaling potential breakout opportunities.
Trading Strategy
Wait for the Squeeze Setup
The most effective approach is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. This occurs when both the long SL (green line) and short SL (red line) are active simultaneously, indicated by the yellow status dot (🟡) in the indicator table. Analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL while price remains compressed—this setup identifies which side is more likely to break first.
Entry Timing and Risk Management
Long Entry: Enter when a candle closes above the in-range short SL (red line) without any wick above it. This "perfect breakout candle" confirms bullish momentum. Your entry should be around the region, with your stop-loss placed just below the top of the breakout candle's high.
Short Entry: Enter when a candle closes below the in-range long SL (green line). The stop-loss for short trades should be set 34.26 points above your entry for appropriate risk protection.
Risk-Reward Considerations
If you enter at the low of a breakout candle, expect only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. However, if you accidentally go long and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss.
Advanced Techniques
Failed Breakout Trap: If a follow-up candle doesn't make a higher high after the initial breakout, consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding for a trap. When your buy-stop sits on top of the breakout candle high, this isn't a valid long trade setup.
Flip Trade Opportunity: In-range stop-loss attempts to flip often provide ideal entry points. If the up candle doesn't break the previous low, this validates the long continuation.
Long Scalp Trading: A failed long scalp can be traded if you missed the initial market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit exceeding 50 points, this provides favorable risk-reward ratios.
Sustained Loss Management: Stop-loss for long positions should target 26 points maximum loss. The indicator automatically invalidates stop-losses when price violates them, keeping your chart clean for the next setup.
-------------------------
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and breakout opportunities based on rolling price windows.
How the Indicator Works
The indicator tracks the highest high and lowest low over your selected lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish dynamic support and resistance levels. These levels create an "in-range" zone that adapts as new price action develops.
Visual Components
Green Line (Long SL): The rolling window's lowest low - your stop-loss level for long positions
Red Line (Short SL): The rolling window's highest high - your stop-loss level for short positions
Status Indicators:
🟡 Yellow: Squeeze condition (both SLs active)
🟢 Green: Long-only setup
🔴 Red: Short-only setup
⚪ White: Neutral (no active SLs)
The Squeeze Setup Strategy
Step 1: Wait for the Squeeze
The most effective way to use the In-Range Rolling SL is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. During the squeeze, both the green and red lines are active, meaning price has stayed within the rolling window without breaking either boundary. This compression phase indicates that it's "go time" to prepare your trade.
While in the squeeze, analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL levels. This analysis helps you determine which side is more likely to split when the breakout occurs.
Step 2: Identify the Perfect Breakout
Long Breakout: A perfect breakout candle should close above the in-range stop-loss high (red line) without any wick above it. This clean breakout demonstrates strong momentum and reduces the risk of a false breakout.
Short Breakout: Look for a candle that closes below the in-range SL low (green line), indicating a short-side trade is coming up.
Step 3: Entry Execution
Long Entry: Your entry should be around the region of the breakout. Position your stop-loss just below the top of the breakout candle's high. This placement protects you from failed breakouts while giving the trade room to develop.
Short Entry: Enter as the candle closes below the in-range SL low. The stop-loss for short-side trades is typically 34.26 points of potential loss based on the indicator's measurements.
Risk-Reward Analysis
Entry at Breakout Low
If you enter here at the low of the breakout candle, you're looking at only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. This represents your best-case entry scenario.
Accidental Wrong-Side Entry
However, if you accidentally go long here and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss. This emphasizes the importance of waiting for clear breakout confirmation.
Long Scalp Opportunity
A failed long scalp can be traded here if you missed the market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit greater than 50 points, this setup offers a favorable risk-reward ratio of approximately 1:1.5.
Advanced Trade Management
Failed Breakout Recognition
Follow-Up Candle Validation: If a follow-up candle did not make a higher high than the breakout candle, this could be a trap. Your buy-stop on top of the breakout candle high is not a valid long trade setup in this scenario. Consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding through the potential reversal.
Flip Trade Opportunities
In-range stop-loss tries to flip to the other side often provide excellent entries. If the up candle did not break the previous low, this validates the long continuation and suggests the squeeze is resolving to the upside.
Sustained Position Management
Stop-Loss Guidelines: Stop-loss for long positions should be 26 points of maximum loss. The indicator table displays the delta (Δ) showing your real-time distance to the active stop-loss, helping you manage risk dynamically.
Entry Timing: Your entry should be around the region where the breakout confirms, rather than chasing price after a large move. In order to prepare your trade, position your stop-loss on top of the breakout candle's high for long trades.
Practical Example from the Chart
Looking at the MNQ1! chart, you can see multiple squeeze formations throughout the session. The most notable sequence shows:
An initial downtrend creating a squeeze setup
A perfect breakout candle closing above the red line without upper wick
The subsequent candle validating the move
Later, a failed breakout attempt that created a short opportunity
Multiple flip attempts that provided re-entry points for scalpers
The indicator's table in the top-right continuously updates with the current SL levels, gap size, candle size, and delta values - giving you all the information needed to assess each trade's risk-reward profile in real-time.
YM Ultimate SNIPER# YM Ultimate SNIPER - Documentation & Trading Guide
## 🎯 Unified GRA + DeepFlow | YM-Optimized for Low Volatility
**TARGET: 3-7 High-Confluence Trades per Day**
> **Philosophy:** *YM's lower volatility is not a weakness—it's our edge. Predictability + precision = consistent profits.*
---
## ⚡ QUICK REFERENCE CARD
```
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ YM ULTIMATE SNIPER - QUICK REFERENCE │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 💰 YM BASICS: │
│ ═════════════ │
│ • 1 tick = 1 point = $5/contract │
│ • Typical daily range: 150-400 points │
│ • 30-40% less volatile than NQ │
│ • More institutional, less retail noise │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 TIER THRESHOLDS (YM-OPTIMIZED): │
│ ══════════════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER: 50+ pts = $250+/contract → HOLD (Institutional sweep) │
│ A-TIER: 25-49 pts = $125-245/contract → SWING (Strong momentum) │
│ B-TIER: 12-24 pts = $60-120/contract → SCALP (Quick grab) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⏰ SESSION WINDOWS: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ LDN → 3:00-5:00 AM ET (European flow) │
│ NY → 9:30-11:30 AM ET (US opening drive) │
│ PWR → 3:00-4:00 PM ET (End-of-day rebalancing) │
│ │
│ Expected Trades: 1-2 LDN | 2-3 NY | 1-2 PWR = 4-7 total │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING (MAX 10 POINTS): │
│ ═══════════════════════════════════════ │
│ Tier Signal: S=3, A=2, B=1 points │
│ In Active Zone: +2 points │
│ POC Aligned: +1 point (POC at body extreme) │
│ Imbalance Support:+1 point (supporting IMB nearby) │
│ Strong Volume: +1 point (2x+ average) │
│ Strong Delta: +1 point (70%+ dominance) │
│ CVD Momentum: +1 point (CVD trending with signal) │
│ │
│ MINIMUM SCORE: 5/10 to show signal (adjustable) │
│ IDEAL SCORE: 7+/10 for highest probability │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🚨 SIGNAL TYPES: │
│ ═════════════════ │
│ S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 → GRA Tier Signals (Full confluence) │
│ Z🎯 → Zone Entry (At DFZ zone + delta + volume) │
│ SP → Single Print (Institutional impulse) │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ✓ ENTRY CHECKLIST: │
│ ═══════════════════ │
│ □ Signal appears (check Score ≥5) │
│ □ Session active (LDN!/NY!/PWR!) │
│ □ Table: Vol GREEN, Delta colored, Body GREEN │
│ □ CVD arrow (▲/▼) matches direction │
│ □ Note stop/target lines on chart │
│ □ Check Zone status (bonus if IN ZONE) │
│ □ Execute at signal candle close │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ 🎯 POSITION SIZING BY TIER: │
│ ═══════════════════════════ │
│ S-TIER (50+ pts): Full size, hold 2-5 min, target 2.5:1 R:R │
│ A-TIER (25-49): 75% size, hold 1-3 min, target 2.0:1 R:R │
│ B-TIER (12-24): 50% size, hold 30-90 sec, target 1.5:1 R:R │
│ │
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │
│ ⛔ DO NOT TRADE WHEN: │
│ ════════════════════ │
│ ✗ Session shows "---" │
│ ✗ Score < 5/10 │
│ ✗ Vol shows RED (<1.8x) │
│ ✗ Delta < 62% │
│ ✗ Multiple conflicting signals │
│ ✗ Just before major news (FOMC, NFP, etc.) │
│ │
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
```
---
## 📋 WHY YM? LEVERAGING LOW VOLATILITY
### The YM Advantage
Most traders avoid YM because "it doesn't move enough." This is precisely why it's perfect for precision scalping:
| Factor | NQ | YM | Advantage |
|--------|----|----|-----------|
| **Daily Range** | 300-600 pts | 150-400 pts | More predictable moves |
| **Tick Value** | $5/tick (4 ticks/pt) | $5/tick (1 tick/pt) | Simpler math |
| **Retail Noise** | High | Low | Cleaner signals |
| **Whipsaws** | Frequent | Rare | Fewer fakeouts |
| **Trend Persistence** | Short | Long | Easier holds |
| **Fill Quality** | Variable | Consistent | Better execution |
### Why 3-7 Trades is the Sweet Spot
```
YM SESSION BREAKDOWN:
════════════════════
LONDON (3-5 AM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: European institutions positioning for US open
├── Character: Slow build-up, clean trends
└── Best signals: Zone entries + A/B tier
NY OPEN (9:30-11:30 AM ET): 2-3 trades
├── Why: Highest volume, most institutional activity
├── Character: Initial balance formation, breakouts
└── Best signals: S/A tier, zone confluence
POWER HOUR (3-4 PM ET): 1-2 trades
├── Why: End-of-day rebalancing, MOC orders
├── Character: Mean reversion or trend acceleration
└── Best signals: Zone entries, B tier quick scalps
TOTAL: 4-7 high-quality setups per day
```
---
## 🔧 YM-SPECIFIC OPTIMIZATIONS
This unified indicator has been specifically tuned for YM's characteristics:
### Tier Thresholds
| Tier | NQ (Original) | YM (Optimized) | Rationale |
|------|---------------|----------------|-----------|
| S-Tier | 100 pts | **50 pts** | YM's daily range is ~50% of NQ |
| A-Tier | 50 pts | **25 pts** | Proportional scaling |
| B-Tier | 20 pts | **12 pts** | Still 5%+ of typical daily range |
### Filter Adjustments
| Filter | NQ Value | YM Value | Why |
|--------|----------|----------|-----|
| Volume Ratio | 1.5x | **1.8x** | Higher bar = less retail noise |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | **62%** | Tighter for cleaner signals |
| Body Ratio | 70% | **72%** | More conviction required |
| Range Multiplier | 1.3x | **1.4x** | Bigger move = real signal |
| Gap ATR% | 30% | **25%** | Smaller gaps still significant |
| Zone Age | 50 bars | **75 bars** | Zones last longer in slow market |
### Why These Changes Work
1. **Higher Volume Bar**: YM has more institutional flow. Requiring 1.8x volume ensures we're catching real moves, not retail chop.
2. **Tighter Delta**: With less noise, we can demand clearer buyer/seller dominance before entering.
3. **Longer Zone Life**: YM trends persist longer. A zone that would be stale in NQ is still viable in YM.
4. **Smaller Gap Threshold**: YM gaps are naturally smaller. 25% of ATR in YM is significant institutional activity.
---
## 📊 CONFLUENCE SCORING SYSTEM
The unified indicator uses a 10-point confluence scoring system to filter for only the highest-probability setups:
### Score Breakdown
```
CONFLUENCE SCORE CALCULATION:
═════════════════════════════
BASE POINTS (Tier):
├── S-Tier signal: +3 points
├── A-Tier signal: +2 points
└── B-Tier signal: +1 point
BONUS POINTS:
├── Inside Active Zone (DFZ): +2 points
│ └── Price within bull/bear zone = institutional level
│
├── POC Alignment: +1 point
│ └── POC at body extreme = strong conviction
│
├── Imbalance Support: +1 point
│ └── Supporting imbalance within 1 ATR
│
├── Strong Volume (2x+): +1 point
│ └── Exceptional institutional participation
│
├── Strong Delta (70%+): +1 point
│ └── Clear one-sided aggression
│
└── CVD Momentum: +1 point
└── CVD trending with signal direction
MAXIMUM POSSIBLE: 10 points
```
### Score Interpretation
| Score | Quality | Action | Expected Win Rate |
|-------|---------|--------|-------------------|
| 8-10 | 🥇 Elite | Full size, hold for target | 75-80% |
| 6-7 | 🥈 Strong | Standard size, manage actively | 65-70% |
| 5 | 🥉 Valid | Reduced size, quick scalp | 55-60% |
| <5 | ⚫ Filtered | No signal shown | N/A |
### Adjusting Minimum Score
- **Conservative (Score ≥6)**: Fewer trades, higher win rate
- **Standard (Score ≥5)**: Balanced approach, 3-7 trades/day
- **Aggressive (Score ≥4)**: More trades, requires active management
---
## 📐 SIGNAL TYPES EXPLAINED
### 1. GRA Tier Signals (S🎯, A🎯, B🎯)
These are the primary signals from the merged GRA system:
```
TIER SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Point movement meets tier threshold
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% (buy or sell dominance)
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of candle range
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.4x average
├── ✓ Small opposite wick (<50% of body)
├── ✓ CVD confirms direction (if enabled)
├── ✓ Active session (LDN/NY/PWR)
└── ✓ Confluence Score ≥ minimum (default 5)
```
### 2. Zone Entry Signals (Z🎯)
When price enters a DeepFlow zone with confirmation:
```
ZONE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Price inside fresh/tested zone (not broken)
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% in zone direction
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.5x average
└── ✓ Active session
NOTE: Z🎯 only appears when NOT already showing tier signal
(prevents duplicate signals on same candle)
```
### 3. Single Print Markers (SP)
Mark institutional impulse candles for future S/R:
```
SINGLE PRINT REQUIREMENTS:
═══════════════════════════
ALL must be TRUE:
├── ✓ Range ≥ 1.6x average
├── ✓ Body ≥ 72% of range
├── ✓ Volume ≥ 1.8x average
├── ✓ Delta ≥ 62% confirms direction
└── ✓ Active session
USE: Horizontal lines at high/low act as future S/R
```
---
## 🎯 TRADING STRATEGIES
### Strategy 1: Zone + Tier Confluence (Highest Probability)
```
THE ULTIMATE YM SETUP:
═══════════════════════
Setup:
1. Active DeepFlow zone exists (green box below for long)
2. Price pulls back INTO the zone
3. Tier signal fires INSIDE the zone (S🎯/A🎯)
4. Score shows 7+/10
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Below zone bottom (for longs)
Target: Based on tier (1.5-2.5:1 R:R)
Why It Works:
• Zone = institutional limit orders
• Tier signal = momentum confirmation
• Double confirmation = high probability
Expected Win Rate: 70-75%
```
### Strategy 2: Pure Tier Signal with POC Stop
```
SNIPER TIER TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Tier signal appears (preferably A or S)
2. Score ≥ 5/10
3. Note POC level on signal candle
4. Red/green stop/target lines appear
Entry: Signal candle close
Stop: Beyond POC (shown on chart)
Target: Auto-calculated based on tier
Key: POC placement matters
• POC near candle bottom (longs) = STRONG
• POC in middle = weaker signal
• POC at extreme = possible exhaustion
Expected Win Rate: 60-65%
```
### Strategy 3: Zone Bounce (Continuation)
```
ZONE BOUNCE TRADE:
══════════════════
Setup:
1. Fresh zone created during session
2. Price leaves zone, moves in zone direction
3. Price returns to test zone (within 15 bars)
4. Z🎯 signal appears or rejection candle forms
Entry: At CE line (middle of zone)
Stop: Beyond zone edge
Target: Previous swing high/low
Why It Works:
• Zones represent unfilled orders
• First retest often finds support/resistance
• Lower volatility = cleaner bounces
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
### Strategy 4: Single Print Scalp
```
SINGLE PRINT SCALP:
═══════════════════
Setup:
1. Single Print (SP) marker appears
2. Note the gold/purple lines at high/low
3. Wait for price to return to SP level
4. Look for rejection or tier signal at level
Entry: At SP line with confirmation
Stop: Beyond the SP line
Target: Quick 1:1 or to next structure
Why It Works:
• SP = price moved too fast, orders unfilled
• Price often returns to "fill" these levels
• YM's slower pace makes retests likely
Expected Win Rate: 55-60%
```
---
## 📊 TABLE LEGEND
| Field | Reading | Color Meaning |
|-------|---------|---------------|
| **Pts** | Current candle points | Gold/Green/Yellow = Tiered |
| **Tier** | S/A/B/X | Tier color or white |
| **Vol** | Volume ratio | 🟢 ≥1.8x, 🔴 <1.8x |
| **Delta** | Buy/Sell % | 🟢 Buy dom, 🔴 Sell dom |
| **Body** | Body % of range | 🟢 ≥72%, 🔴 <72% |
| **CVD** | Trend direction | ▲ Bullish, ▼ Bearish |
| **Sess** | Active session | 🟡 LDN!/NY!/PWR!, ⚫ --- |
| **POC** | Point of Control | 🟡 Gold price level |
| **Zone** | Zone position | 🟢 BUY⬚, 🔴 SELL⬚, ⚫ --- |
| **Zones** | Active zone count | #B/#S format |
| **Score** | Confluence score | 🟢 7+, 🟡 5-6, ⚫ <5 |
| **IMB** | Recent imbalances | Count in last 10 bars |
| **R:R** | Risk/Reward | 🟢 On signal, ⚫ No signal |
---
## ⏰ SESSION-SPECIFIC PLAYBOOKS
### London Session (3:00-5:00 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Slow, methodical, trend-building
VOLUME: Medium (50-70% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: Zone entries, A/B tier with zones
PLAYBOOK:
• Enter on zone retests
• Expect 15-25 pt moves
• Don't fight early direction
• Watch for pre-NY positioning
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
### NY Open (9:30-11:30 AM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Fast, volatile, high-conviction
VOLUME: Highest of day
BEST SETUPS: S/A tier, zone confluence
PLAYBOOK:
• First 15 min: Observe Initial Balance
• 9:45-10:15: Best setups form
• S-tier signals = ride the wave
• Be aggressive on high scores
TYPICAL TRADES: 2-3
```
### Power Hour (3:00-4:00 PM ET)
```
CHARACTER: Rebalancing, MOC orders
VOLUME: Medium-high (70-80% of NY)
BEST SETUPS: B tier scalps, zone entries
PLAYBOOK:
• Watch for mean reversion setups
• Quick scalps around POC levels
• Don't hold through close
• Take profits at 1:1 R:R
TYPICAL TRADES: 1-2
```
---
## 🔧 RECOMMENDED SETTINGS
### Conservative (Fewer, Better Trades)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 6 | Only strong setups |
| Min Volume Ratio | 2.0 | Higher bar |
| Delta Threshold | 65% | Stricter dominance |
| Max Zones | 8 | Less clutter |
### Standard (Balanced)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 5 | Default |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.8 | Default |
| Delta Threshold | 62% | Default |
| Max Zones | 12 | Default |
### Aggressive (More Opportunities)
| Setting | Value | Notes |
|---------|-------|-------|
| Min Confluence Score | 4 | More signals |
| Min Volume Ratio | 1.5 | Lower bar |
| Delta Threshold | 60% | Looser |
| Max Zones | 15 | More context |
---
## 🚨 ALERT SETUP
Configure these alerts in TradingView:
| Alert | Priority | Action |
|-------|----------|--------|
| 🎯 YM S-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🔴 CRITICAL | Drop everything, check immediately |
| 🎯 YM A-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟠 HIGH | Evaluate within 15 seconds |
| 🎯 YM B-TIER LONG/SHORT | 🟡 MEDIUM | Check if available |
| 🎯 YM ZONE BUY/SELL | 🟢 STANDARD | Good context entry |
| 📦 NEW ZONE | 🔵 INFO | Mark on mental map |
| ⭐ SINGLE PRINT | 🔵 INFO | Note for future S/R |
| SESSION OPEN | ⚪ INFO | Prepare to trade |
### Alert Message Format
```
🎯 YM A-LONG | YM1! @ 42,150 | 68%B | Score: 7/10 | IN ZONE | POC: 42,125 | Stop: 42,098 | SWING
```
---
## ⚠️ COMMON MISTAKES TO AVOID
| Mistake | Why It's Bad | Solution |
|---------|-------------|----------|
| Trading outside sessions | Low volume = noise | Wait for LDN/NY/PWR |
| Ignoring score | Low scores = low probability | Require ≥5/10 |
| Fighting the zone | Zones are institutional | Trade WITH zones |
| Oversizing B-tier | Quick scalps, not holds | 50% size max |
| Holding through news | Volatility spike | Exit before FOMC, NFP |
| Chasing after signal | Entry on close only | Miss it = wait for next |
| Ignoring POC position | Middle POC = indecision | Strong = extreme POC |
---
## 📈 DAILY TRADE JOURNAL TEMPLATE
```
DATE: ___________
SESSION: □ LDN □ NY □ PWR
TRADE 1:
├── Time: _______
├── Signal: S🎯 / A🎯 / B🎯 / Z🎯
├── Score: ___/10
├── Entry: _______
├── Stop: _______
├── Target: _______
├── In Zone: □ Yes □ No
├── Result: +/- ___ pts ($_____)
└── Notes: _______________________
TRADE 2:
DAILY SUMMARY:
├── Total Trades: ___
├── Win Rate: ___%
├── Net P/L: $_____
├── Best Setup: _______
└── Improvement: _______________________
```
---
## 🏆 GOLDEN RULES FOR YM
> **"YM rewards patience. Wait for the confluence—it's worth it."**
> **"Low volatility means you can size up. One good trade beats five forced trades."**
> **"Score 7+ is your edge. Anything less is gambling."**
> **"The zone + tier combo is your bread and butter. Master it."**
> **"Leave every trade with money. YM gives you time to manage."**
---
## 📊 VISUAL GUIDE
```
PERFECT YM SNIPER SETUP:
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
│ Current Price
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BEARISH ZONE (Red) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for shorts) - - - - - - │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP High (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────┤
│█████████████████████│ ← A🎯 LONG Signal
│█████████████████████│ Score: 8/10
│ ●──────────────────│ ← POC (Gold) near bottom = STRONG
│█████████████████████│
│█████████████████████│
└─────────────────────┤
│
══════════════════╪══════════════════ SP Low (Purple)
│
┌─────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────┐
│ BULLISH ZONE (Green) │
│- - - - - - - CE Line (Entry for longs) - - - - - - -│
│██████████████████████████████████████████████████████│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
Stop Loss
CONFLUENCE CHECK:
✓ A-Tier signal (+2)
✓ At edge of bullish zone (+2)
✓ POC at bottom of candle (+1)
✓ Strong volume 2.3x (+1)
✓ Delta 72% buyers (+1)
✓ CVD bullish (+1)
TOTAL: 8/10 = ELITE SETUP
ACTION: Full size LONG at signal candle close
STOP: Below zone bottom
TARGET: 2:1 R:R (auto-calculated)
```
---
## 🔧 TROUBLESHOOTING
| Issue | Cause | Fix |
|-------|-------|-----|
| No signals appearing | Score too high | Lower min score to 4-5 |
| Too many signals | Score too low | Raise min score to 6+ |
| Zones cluttering chart | Max zones high | Reduce to 8-10 |
| POC not showing | Tiered filter on | Check "POC Only Tiered" |
| Session not highlighting | Wrong timezone | Verify timezone setting |
| Alerts not firing | Not configured | Set up in TradingView alerts |
---
## 📝 PINE SCRIPT V6 TECHNICAL NOTES
This indicator uses advanced features:
- **User Defined Types (UDT)**: Clean state management for zones/imbalances
- **`request.security_lower_tf()`**: Intrabar volume analysis
- **Dynamic Array Management**: Efficient memory for drawings
- **Confluence Scoring Engine**: Multi-factor signal qualification
- **Auto Stop/Target**: Dynamic risk management calculation
**Minimum TradingView Plan:** Pro (for intrabar data access)
---
*© Alexandro Disla - YM Ultimate SNIPER*
*Pine Script v6 | TradingView*
*Unified GRA v5 + DeepFlow Zones | YM-Optimized*
Inversion Fair Value Gap Model [PJ Trades]GENERAL OVERVIEW:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator is a complete rule-based system designed to identify trade setups using the Inversion Fair Value Gap strategy taught by PJ Trades. It automates the strategy’s workflow by detecting liquidity sweeps, confirming V-shape recoveries, identifying valid Inversion Fair Value Gaps, validating higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap taps, and checking for a clear opposite Draw On Liquidity. These factors are evaluated together to produce a signal rating of A, A+, or A++, based on how many of these criteria the setup satisfies. When a long or short setup is confirmed, the indicator automatically plots an entry, stop-loss, break-even, and two take-profit levels.
A dashboard that updates in real-time displays the current directional bias, liquidity sweep activity, Inversion Fair Value Gap confirmation state, V Shape Recovery state, higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap context, opposite Draw on Liquidity, SMT divergence, and other key information relevant to the trading model. The indicator also includes optional trade statistics on the dashboard that tracks the recent win rates for A, A+, and A++ setups, as well as separate long and short win rates.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts, in collaboration with PJ Trades.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap model is built on the idea that when the market pushes above a high or below a low, it often does so to sweep liquidity. If that move quickly fails and price reverses, it shows the sweep was a grab for orders and not a continuation. That quick rejection is the V Shape Recovery behavior. An Inversion Fair Value Gap forms when a Fair Value Gap that once supported the original move gets invalidated afterward. That invalidation confirms the shift in direction and becomes the new reference point for trades. The Inversion Fair Value Gap model uses this sequence because it highlights when the market has taken liquidity, rejected continuation, and started delivering in the opposite direction.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAP MODEL FEATURES:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 15 main features:
Sessions
Key Levels & Swing Levels
Liquidity Levels
Liquidity Sweeps
V Shape Recoveries
Higher-Timeframe Fair Value Gaps
Inversion Fair Value Gaps
Macros
Bias
Signals
New Day Opening Gap
New Week Opening Gap
SMT Divergences
Dashboard
Alerts
SESSIONS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes five trading sessions (times in EST):
Asia: 20:00 - 00:00
London: 02:00 - 05:00
NY AM: 09:30 - 12:15
NY Lunch: 12:15 - 13:30
NY PM: 13:30 - 16:00
Session highs and lows are automatically tracked and used within the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Session Zones:
Each session has a zone that outlines its active time window. These zones can be toggled on or off independently. When active, they visually separate each part of the trading day. Users can adjust the color and opacity of each session box. Users can also enable session labels, which place a label above each session zone showing its corresponding session name.
🔹Session Time:
Users can toggle on ‘Time’ which will display each session’s time window next to its session title.
🔹Session Highs/Lows:
Every session can display its own high and low as horizontal lines. Users can customize the line style for session highs/lows, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted. The color of the lines will match the same color used for the session box. Users can adjust the color of the labels as well, which is applied to all session high/low labels.
When price has moved above a session high, or below a session low, the label will not be displayed anymore.
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each session’s high and low levels can be extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a session under the main Sessions section only hides its visuals (boxes, lines, or labels). It does not impact signal detection or logic.
KEY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 11 key market levels that outline important structural price areas across daily, weekly, and monthly timeframes. These levels include the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, Previous Week High/Low, Monthly Open, Previous Month High/Low, Midnight Open, and 08:30 Open. The levels can be enabled or disabled and customized in color and line style. All of the levels except the Midnight Open and 08:30 Open are used for the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Daily Open
The Daily Open marks where the current trading day began.
🔹Previous Day High/Low
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed.
The Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in.
When price pushes above the PDH or below the PDL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Weekly Open
The Weekly Open marks the first price of the current trading week.
🔹Previous Week High/Low
The Previous Week High (PWH) marks the highest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where buying pressure reached its peak before the weekly close.
The Previous Week Low (PWL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where sellers pushed price to its lowest point before buyers regained control.
When price pushes above the PWH or below the PWL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Monthly Open
The Monthly Open marks the opening price of the current month.
🔹Previous Month High/Low
The Previous Month High (PMH) marks the highest price reached during the previous calendar month. It represents the point at which buyers achieved the strongest push before the monthly close.
The Previous Month Low (PML) marks the lowest price reached during the previous calendar month. It shows where selling pressure was strongest before buyers stepped back in.
When price pushes above the PMH or below the PML, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Midnight Open
The Midnight Open marks the first price of the trading day at 00:00 EST.
🔹08:30 Open
The 08:30 Open marks the opening price at 08:30 EST.
🔹Customization Options:
Users can fully customize the appearance of all key levels, including the following:
Labels
Label Size
Line Style
Line Colors
Labels:
Users can toggle on ‘Show Labels’ to display labels for each toggled-on level that price hasn’t pushed above/below. Users can also adjust the size of labels, choosing between auto, tiny, small, normal, large, or huge.
Line Style:
Users can select a line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted, which is applied to all toggled-on key levels.
Line Color:
Users can choose different colors for each of the following key levels:
Daily Open, Previous Day High, Previous Day Low
Weekly Open, Previous Week High, Previous Week Low,
Monthly Open, Previous Month High, Previous Month Low
Midnight Open
08:30 Open
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each key level is extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a level in the “Key Levels” section only hides its visuals and does not affect the indicator’s signals.
🔹Swing Levels
The indicator automatically plots Swing Highs and Swing Lows which are used in the indicator’s signal generation logic.
A swing high forms when a candle’s high is greater than the highs of the bars immediately before and after it.
A swing low forms when a candle’s low is lower than the lows of the bars immediately before and after it.
🔹Swing Level Colors
Users can customize the color of Active Levels and Swept Levels.
Active Levels are levels that price has not pushed above or below
Swept Levels are levels that price pushed above or below.
🔹Swing Levels – Show Nearest
This setting determines how many swing highs/lows are displayed on the chart. The indicator will display the nearest X highs to price and the nearest X lows to price.
For example, if ‘Show Nearest’ is set to 2, the nearest 2 swing highs and nearest 2 swing lows to price will be plotted on the chart.
LIQUIDITY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator automatically identifies and plots liquidity at key structural points in the market. These include swing highs and swing lows, session highs and lows, and major higher timeframe reference points as explained in the SESSIONS and KEY LEVELS sections above. All of these areas are treated as potential pools of resting orders and are used throughout the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹What is Buyside Liquidity?:
Buyside Liquidity (BSL) represents price levels where many buy stop orders are sitting, usually from traders holding short positions. When price moves into these areas, those stop-loss orders get triggered and short sellers are forced to buy back their positions. These zones often form above key highs such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding BSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the sudden wave of buy orders can create sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹What is Sellside Liquidity?:
Sellside Liquidity (SSL) represents price levels where many sell stop orders are waiting, usually from traders holding long positions. When price drops into these areas, those stop-loss orders are triggered and long traders are forced to sell their positions. These zones often form below key lows such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding SSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the surge of sell orders can cause sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹 Which Liquidity Levels Are Used
The indicator tracks liquidity at the following areas:
Asia Session High/Low
London High/Low
NY AM High/Low
NY Lunch High/Low
NY PM High/Low
Previous Day High and Low
Previous Week High and Low
Previous Month High and Low
Daily Open
Weekly Open
Monthly Open
Swing Highs/Lows
🔹 How Liquidity Levels Are Used
All tracked levels across sessions, swing points, and higher timeframes serve as potential liquidity targets. When price trades above one of these highs, the indicator looks for short setups if other confluences align. When price trades below lows, the indicator looks for long setups if other confluences align.
LIQUIDITY SWEEPS:
The indicator automatically detects Buyside Liquidity and Sellside Liquidity sweeps using the liquidity levels mentioned in the previous section.
🔹What is a Liquidity Sweep?
Liquidity sweeps occur when price trades beyond a key high or low and activates resting buy-stop or sell-stop orders in that area. It’s how the market gathers the liquidity needed for larger participants to enter positions.
Traders often place stop-loss orders around obvious highs and lows, such as the previous day’s, week’s, or month’s levels. When price pushes through one of these areas, it triggers the stops placed there and generates a burst of volume. This can lead to quick movements in price as those orders are executed.
🔹Sellside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips below a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by long traders below that low. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential long setups as the next step in the IFVG trading strategy. Long trades are only eligible after a SSL sweep.
🔹Buyside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips above a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by short seller traders above that high. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential short setups as the next step in the trading strategy. Short trades are only eligible after a BSL sweep.
🔹How to Use Liquidity Sweeps
Liquidity sweeps are not direct trade signals. They are best used as context when forming a directional bias. A sweep shows that the market has removed liquidity from one side, which can hint at where the next move may develop.
For example:
When BSL is swept, it often signals that buy stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move lower. Traders may then begin looking for short opportunities.
When SSL is swept, it often signals that sell stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move higher. Traders may then begin looking for long opportunities.
V SHAPE RECOVERIES:
🔹 What Is a V Shape Recovery?
A V shape recovery is a sharp, immediate reversal that happens right after price sweeps BSL or SSL. It indicates that price quickly moved back in the opposite direction after trading through the level. This behavior signals a shift in momentum and is a required confirmation in the indicator for signal generation. The indicator will not look for long trades after a SSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. It will not look for short trades after a BSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. Without this behavior, the indicator assumes that price may still be delivering in the direction of the sweep, so no valid setups can form.
🔹 Why V Shape Recoveries Matter
V shape recoveries help confirm that the liquidity the sweep did not immediately continue in the same direction. They separate false breaks from true continuation. A sweep without recovery often means price may keep trending, so the indicator does not generate signals in those cases. A sweep with a V shape recovery confirms rejection and sets the foundation for valid Inversion Fair Value Gap formation. This makes the V shape recovery one of the most important sequence steps in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model.
🔹 How the Indicator Detects V Shape Recoveries
V shape recoveries can be visually intuitive when looking at a chart, but they are difficult to define consistently programmatically. To ensure reliable and repeatable detection, the indicator uses a rules-based method that evaluates candle size, candle direction, and the strength of the move immediately following the liquidity sweep. This approach removes subjectivity and allows the indicator to confirm V shape behavior the same way every time.
The indicator does not plot any visual elements specifically for V shape recoveries. Instead, the presence of a V shape recovery is implied through the signals themselves. Every valid long or short signal that appears after a liquidity sweep requires a confirmed V shape recovery. This means that if a signal is generated following a sweep, a V shape recovery has occurred.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Sellside Sweep (SSL Sweep)
After price trades below a sellside liquidity level, long positions are liquidated. If buyers quickly step in and force price upward with strong momentum, this forms a V shape recovery. This signals that the sweep below the low was rejected and that buyers have reclaimed control. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for long setups.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Buyside Sweep (BSL Sweep)
After price pushes above a buyside liquidity level, many short positions are stopped out. If sellers immediately step in and drive price back down with strong movement, this forms a V shape recovery. This behavior reflects a quick change in candle direction immediately following the sweep. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for short setups.
🔹Failed V Shape Recoveries
These examples show failed V shape recoveries, where price did not reverse decisively after the BSL or SSL sweep. The lack of strong response from buyers or sellers indicates that momentum did not shift. Thus, the indicator will not detect valid long/short setups using these liquidity sweeps.
HIGHER-TIMEFRAME FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Higher-timeframe Fair Value Gaps (HTF FVGs) provide important context in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model because they show where significant imbalance occurred on larger market structures. The indicator automatically detects HTF FVGs and uses them as part of the signal rating system.
🔹 What Is a Fair Value Gap?
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it.
A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
This creates an imbalance because price moved so quickly that one side of the auction did not trade.
Examples:
🔹 What Makes an FVG “Higher-Timeframe”?
In this indicator, HTF FVGs are Fair Value Gaps detected on timeframes higher than the chart’s current timeframe. For example, on a 5-minute chart, a 1-hour FVG would be considered a HTF FVG. The indicator automatically plots and checks whether price interacts with these HTF FVGs during a liquidity sweep and incorporates this into the signal rating (A, A+, A++).
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Higher-Timeframe FVGs
The indicator automatically scans up to three user-selected higher timeframes for valid bullish and bearish FVGs and tracks price’s behavior around them in the background. When any of these higher timeframes are enabled, their FVGs are used directly within the signal logic.
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
When an HTF FVG tap aligns with the direction of the setup, the signal’s rating is increased. This can increase a setup’s rating from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
🔹 Higher-Timeframe FVG Customization
Users can select up to three higher timeframes for HTF FVG detection. When a higher timeframe is enabled, its FVGs are used in the model’s signal logic. Users can also choose whether to display these HTF FVGs visually on the chart, by enabling the ‘Plot HTF FVGs’ setting.
Each enabled HTF FVG can be customized with the following options:
Bullish and Bearish Colors: Users can set different fill colors for bullish and bearish HTF FVGs for each selected timeframe.
Midline: When enabled, a midline is drawn through the center of each HTF FVG. Users can customize the midline’s line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted and also customize the midline’s color.
Labels: When enabled, each plotted HTF FVG displays a label that shows its originating timeframe (for example, 1H, 4H).
Plot HTF FVGs: When disabled, the HTF FVG zones are hidden from the chart while the logic remains active in the background for signals.
Show Nearest:
This setting controls how many HTF FVGs are displayed based on proximity to current price. Users can choose to show the nearest X bullish HTF FVGs and the nearest X bearish HTF FVGs. This filter is applied across all enabled higher timeframes and does not limit by timeframe individually.
🔹When are Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps mitigated?
A Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gap is considered mitigated when a candle from the chart’s timeframe closes above the gap for a bearish FVG or below the gap for a bullish FVG.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Inversion Fair Value Gaps (IFVGs) are a core requirement of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. Every long and short signal generated by the indicator requires a valid IFVG, just like liquidity sweeps and V shape recoveries. Without a confirmed IFVG, the model will not produce a setup.
🔹 What Is an Inversion Fair Value Gap?
An Inversion Fair Value Gap is a Fair Value Gap that becomes invalidated by a candle close in the opposite direction. This “flip” confirms that the original imbalance failed and that the market has shifted.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above it.
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below it.
In the indicator, IFVGs are not used as retracement areas. Signals are generated immediately when a valid IFVG forms, not after price returns to the gap. The IFVG itself is the confirmation event that finalizes a setup sequence after a liquidity sweep and V shape recovery.
🔹 How the Indicator Plots IFVGs
The indicator only plots IFVGs that are used in long or short setups. Not every possible IFVG is shown on the chart. Only the IFVG involved in a confirmed signal is displayed. Users can disable IFVG plots entirely if they prefer a minimal view. This hides the visual gaps but does not affect the signal logic.
🔹 Customization Options
Users can customize how IFVGs appear on the chart:
Color Settings: Choose separate fill colors for bullish IFVGs and bearish IFVGs.
Midline: Toggle an optional midline inside the IFVG and choose between a solid, dashed, or dotted line.
Midline Color: Adjust the color of the IFVG Midline.
MACROS:
Macros are short, predefined time windows, where price is more likely to seek liquidity or rebalance imbalances. These periods often create sharp movements or shifts in delivery, giving additional context to setups. In the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model, macros are used as a confluence factor. When a long or short signal forms during a macro time window, the setup’s rating can increase from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
Macros are not required for a signal to form, but they increase the signal’s rating when the setup aligns with macro timing.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Macros
The indicator allows users to enable up to five macros. Each macro has its own start and end time, which the user can customize. These time windows are used directly in the signal logic. If a valid IFVG setup forms while price is inside any of the enabled macro windows, the indicator increases the signal’s rating.
Users may visually disable macros on the chart without affecting signal logic. Disabling visuals hides the macro zones, labels, and lines, but the underlying macro logic continues to function in the background for signals.
The indicator’s default macros use the following time periods (in EST):
09:50 - 10:10
10:50 - 11:10
11:50 - 12:10
12:50 - 13:10
13:50 - 14:10
🔹 Macro Settings
Each macro displays a shaded zone representing the active time window. This zone can be toggled on or off. Users can customize:
The color of each macro zone
The opacity of each zone
Whether the zones display at all (‘Show Zones’)
These visuals help identify whether price is currently inside a macro window.
🔹 Macro Labels:
Users can enable macro labels, which place a text label showing the macro’s title and its time window. The label color is global (applies to all macros), and the label size can be adjusted. Individual macros cannot have unique label colors.
🔹 Macro Start/End Lines
For additional clarity, the indicator draws two vertical markers for each macro:
One at the start of the macro
One at the end of the macro
A horizontal macro line is then drawn between the highs of these two candles to highlight the full duration of the macro window. Users can customize:
The line styles (solid, dashed, dotted) of the Macro Line and Start/End Lines
BIAS:
Bias determines which direction the indicator is allowed to generate signals. A bullish bias means only long setups can be confirmed. A bearish bias means only short setups can be confirmed. The bias acts as the final directional filter after a liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG have all been validated. Even if all model conditions are met, the indicator will only confirm the setup if the direction aligns with the active bias.
Users are able to manually set a bias or use an automatic bias filter, which is explained below.
🔹 Manual Bias
Users can manually choose the directional bias at any time and choose between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
When set to Bullish, the indicator will only confirm long setups, regardless of market structure.
When set to Bearish, only short setups are allowed.
When set to Both, the indicator can confirm both long and short setups if all requirements are met.
🔹 Automatic Bias
Automatic bias is fully rules-based and determined by how the previous session interacted with major draw-on-liquidity (DOL) levels. These levels include 1-hour highs and lows, 4-hour highs and lows, previous session highs and lows (such as Asia or London), and the previous day’s high and low. The indicator evaluates whether the previous session consolidated, manipulated liquidity, or manipulated and reversed before closing. Based on this behavior, the indicator establishes a directional bias for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Consolidation:
If the previous session did not sweep any major liquidity levels and price remained inside its range, the session is classified as consolidation.
After the current session sweeps a key low, the bias becomes bullish.
After the current session sweeps a key high, the bias becomes bearish.
The bias is determined live based on which side the current session manipulates first.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation (No Reversal):
If the previous session swept a major high-timeframe level but did not reverse before the session closed, the model assigns a reversal-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low, the current session bias is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high, the current session bias is bearish.
Here, bias is determined immediately because the previous session’s manipulation defines the directional framework for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation + Reversal:
If the previous session swept a DOL level and also reversed away from it within the same session, the model assigns a continuation-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low and reversed upward, the bias for the current session is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high and reversed downward, the bias is bearish.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Bias in Practice
After the indicator validates the liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG, it checks the active bias before confirming a signal.
If bias is bullish, only long setups are allowed.
If bias is bearish, only short setups are allowed.
If bias is Both, setups of either direction may form.
The bias does not influence the detection of liquidity sweeps, V shape recoveries, or IFVGs. It only determines whether those validated components are allowed to produce a final signal. Automatic bias updates based on session behavior, while manual bias remains fixed until the user changes it.
SIGNALS:
Signals are the final output of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator. A signal is only generated when all model conditions are satisfied in a clear, rules-based sequence.
A signal consists of:
An Entry
A Stop-Loss (SL)
A Breakeven (BE) level
Two Take-Profit levels (TP1 and TP2)
These components are plotted immediately once the final requirement (the IFVG confirmation) is met and the directional filter (bias) allows the setup.
Signals can be rated A, A+, or A++, based on whether certain confluences were present during the setup’s formation.
🔹 What All Signals Have in Common
Each signal type (A, A+, A++) requires the same four mandatory conditions. If any of these four are missing, the indicator will not print a signal.
◇ Required Component #1 – Valid Directional Bias
The bias determines whether the indicator can confirm a long or short setup.
Bullish bias → only long setups allowed
Bearish bias → only short setups allowed
Both → long or short setups allowed
Automatic bias → bias determined by session-based liquidity logic explained above
◇ Required Component #2 – Liquidity Sweep
The indicator must detect one of the following:
Sellside Liquidity Sweep (SSL Sweep) for potential long setups
Buyside Liquidity Sweep (BSL Sweep) for potential short setups
◇ Required Component #3 – V Shape Recovery
After a liquidity sweep, the indicator evaluates whether price produced a valid V shape recovery.
◇ Required Component #4 – Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
An IFVG must form in the direction of the potential setup.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above that gap
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below that gap
The IFVG must occur after the V Shape Recovery and Liquidity Sweep. The IFVG confirmation is the final structural requirement. Once it forms, the setup is considered structurally complete.
🔹 A Signals
An A-rated signal contains exactly the four required components:
Valid Bias
Liquidity Sweep
V Shape Recovery
IFVG
An A signals represent the foundational implementation of the IFVG Model.
🔹 A+ Signals
An A+ signal includes the full A-signal structure plus ONE of the following:
Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
Multi-Liquidity Sweep
Inside a Macro Window
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
◇ Multi-Liquidity Sweep
A Multi-Liquidity Sweep occurs when price sweeps two liquidity levels of the same type in the same directional push.
Sweeping two lows in one move: Multi-Sellside Liquidity Sweep (long setups).
Sweeping two highs in one move → Multi-Buyside Liquidity Sweep (short setups).
◇ Inside a Macro Window
The final IFVG confirmation must occur inside a macro time window defined by the user.
If exactly one of these additional confluences is present, the signal rating is A+.
🔹 A++ Signals (Two Additional Confluences)
An A++ signal contains the full A signal structure plus TWO of the three confluences listed above.
HTF FVG tap + Multi-Liquidity Sweep
HTF FVG tap + Inside a Macro Window
Multi-Liquidity Sweep + Inside a Macro Window
If two confluences are present, the rating becomes A++. If all three are present, the setup is still rated a A++ (there is no A+++).
🔹 Signal Plots
When a valid long/short setup is detected, a signal with its rating appears with the following:
Entry: At the close of the candle that inverted a FVG
Stop-Loss: At the nearest swing high for short setups or nearest swing low for long setups
Breakeven Level: At the nearest swing high for long setups or the nearest swing low for short setups
Take-Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high for long setups or the second nearest swing low for short setups.
Take-Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high for long setups or the third nearest swing low for short setups.
After a signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels for Entry, SL, BE, TP1, and TP2 are removed from the chart. If another signal appears before the prior signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels are also removed.
Users can hover over any signal label to view a short summary of the exact criteria that were met for that setup. This includes whether a HTF FVG tap occurred, whether a multi-liquidity sweep was detected, whether the setup formed inside a macro window, and which liquidity level was swept prior to the V shape recovery.
🔹 Long Setup – A Rating
A long A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. First, price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bullish IFVG must form by invalidating a bearish Fair Value Gap with a candle close above it.
For a confirmed long signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bearish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps a swing low, has a V Shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A Rating
A short A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. Price must first sweep a Buyside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bearish IFVG must form by invalidating a bullish Fair Value Gap with a candle close below it.
For a confirmed short signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bullish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG:
🔹 Long Setup – A+ Rating
A long A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG by invalidating a bearish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bullish HTF FVG tap during the liquidity sweep, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps the NY AM Session Low, taps a 30-minute HTF FVG during the sweep, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A+ Rating
A short A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG by invalidating a bullish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 13:50-14:10 macro:
🔹 Long Setup – A++ Rating
A long A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bullish HTF FVG tap, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps two swing lows, has a V shape recovery, taps a bullish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bullish IFVG inside of the 10:50-11:10 macro:
🔹 Short Setup – A++ Rating
A short A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, taps a bearish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 09:50-10:10 macro:
🔹Signal Settings
◇ Liquidity Levels Used:
Users can select which type of liquidity levels the indicator uses for identifying liquidity sweeps:
Swing Points: Only uses Swing Highs/Lows
Session Highs/Lows: Only uses Session Highs/Lows
Both: Uses both Swing Highs/Lows and Session Highs/Lows
◇ Bias:
This setting determines which signal directions are allowed.
Manual Bias: Users can manually choose the directional bias, picking between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
Automatic Bias: The indicator automatically determines a directional bias based on the criteria mentioned in the previous Bias section.
◇ IFVG Sensitivity:
This setting determines the minimum gap size required for an FVG to qualify as an Inversion FVG.
Higher values: only larger FVGs become IFVGs
Lower values: smaller gaps are allowed
◇ Use First Presented IFVG:
This setting determines whether the indicator limits signals to only the first IFVG created within the manipulation leg.
What Is the First Presented IFVG?
It is the earliest FVG formed inside the displacement that causes the liquidity sweep.
For a bearish manipulation leg (price moving downward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that downward move:
For a bullish manipulation leg (price moving upward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that upward move:
When this setting is enabled, the indicator will only confirm signals when the IFVG used is derived from this first presented FVG. IFVGs that form later in the manipulation leg are not used for signal generation.
◇ Only Take Trades:
This setting allows users to restrict signals to a defined time window.
If a complete setup occurs inside the time window, it is allowed and plotted
If it occurs outside the window, the signal will not appear
For example, if you only wanted to see long/short signals between 9:30 AM and 12:00 PM, you would enable this setting and set the time window from 09:30 - 12:00.
◇ Minimum R:R
This setting allows users to require a minimum risk-to-reward ratio before a signal is confirmed and plotted on the chart. The risk-to-reward ratio is calculated using the distance from the Entry to the Stop-Loss (risk) and the distance from the Entry to TP2 (reward). The indicator compares these distances and determines whether the setup meets or exceeds the minimum R:R value selected by the user.
If the calculated R:R is equal to or greater than the chosen threshold, the signal will be displayed.
If the calculated R:R is lower than the threshold, the signal will not appear on the chart.
🔹 Signal Rating Minimum
Users can restrict which signal ratings appear:
A: shows all signals
A+: shows only A+ and A++
A++: shows only A++ setups
🔹 Signal Styling and Customization
The indicator provides full control over how signal labels and levels appear on your chart. Users can customize long signals, short signals, all plotted lines, and the visibility of every individual element.
◇ Long Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Long Signal Label Color
Long Signal Text Color
Long Signal Label Size
◇ Short Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Short Signal Label Color
Short Signal Text Color
Short Signal Label Size
◇ Entry, Stop Loss, Breakeven, and Take Profit Lines
Each line type can be enabled or disabled individually:
Entry Line
Stop Loss Line
Breakeven Line
Take Profit 1 & 2 Lines
Users can also set custom colors for each line so every level is easy to track during live price movement.
◇ Show Price Labels
Price labels can be toggled on or off individually for each level. Users can choose whether to show or hide the price for:
Entry
Stop loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1 & 2
NEW DAY OPENING GAP:
The New Day Opening Gap (NDOG) highlights the price difference between the previous day’s closing candle and the first candle of the new trading day. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each day and makes it available as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Day Opening Gap?
A New Day Opening Gap forms when the trading day opens at a price different from the previous day’s final closing price.
If the new day opens above the prior day’s close → Bullish NDOG
If the new day opens below the prior day’s close → Bearish NDOG
This gap acts as a short-term draw on liquidity because the market may revisit the gap to rebalance price delivery. While the NDOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Day Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous day’s close to the new day’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next day’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NDOG replaces it the following day, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NDOG for signal generation. It is strictly a visual tool that helps traders identify areas where price may retrace or seek liquidity during the session.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Day Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Day Opening Gap: Toggle the NDOG zone on or off
Bullish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed above the prior close
Bearish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed below the prior close
NEW WEEK OPENING GAP:
The New Week Opening Gap (NWOG) highlights the price difference between the previous week’s final closing candle and the first candle of the new trading week. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each week and provides it as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Week Opening Gap?
A New Week Opening Gap forms when the new trading week opens at a price different from the previous week’s closing price.
If the new week opens above the prior week’s close → Bullish NWOG
If the new week opens below the prior week’s close → Bearish NWOG
This gap often serves as a medium-term draw on liquidity because price may return to rebalance the weekly displacement. The NWOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Week Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous week’s close to the new week’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next week’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NWOG replaces it the following week, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NWOG for signal generation. It is purely a visual reference to help traders identify areas where price may rebalance or seek liquidity during the week.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Week Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Week Opening Gap: Toggle the NWOG zone on or off
Bullish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed above the prior weekly close
Bearish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed below the prior weekly close
SMT DIVERGENCES:
The indicator automatically marks SMT Divergences that occur between the current selected chart ticker and a second user-selected ticker.
A SMT Divergence forms when the prices of the currently selected chart ticker and the user-selected ticker don’t follow each other. For example, if the current chart’s ticker symbol is SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and the user-selected ticker is $ES. If SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ does not sweep the low of the NY AM Session, but NYSE:ES sweeps that same exact session’s low during the same candle, then a SMT Divergence is detected.
In the images below, SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and NYSE:ES form a low at 12:20 AM on November 12th. At 12:35 AM, the 12:20 AM low is taken out on $NQ. However, on NYSE:ES , price failed to take out this exact low at 12:35 AM. Thus, an SMT Divergence is detected, and a line is drawn between the two lows on $NQ.
NYSE:ES Chart:
SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ Chart:
🔹 SMT Divergence Settings
The indicator includes settings that allow users to control how SMT Divergences are detected and displayed.
◇ Length
Length controls how sensitive the pivot detection is when finding highs and lows for SMT.
Lower Length: confirms swings with fewer bars, so more swings qualify.
Higher Length: requires more bars to confirm a swing, so fewer swings qualify.
◇ Divergence Length
The Divergence Length setting defines how many bars apart the two swing points may be for them to count as part of the same SMT Divergence.
Higher Values: The two instruments can form their swing highs or lows farther apart in time. As long as both swings occur within this wider bar window, the indicator compares them for divergence.
Lower Values: The two swing points must occur very close to each other.
◇ Show Last
This setting limits how many recent SMT Divergences are displayed on the chart. For example, setting Show Last to 1 will only show the most recent SMT Divergence, while higher values allow more historical SMT Divergences to remain visible on the chart.
◇ Divergence Ticker
Users can change the ticker used for detections. Since SMT Divergences occur by comparing two tickers, the inputted ticker within the settings will always be compared to the current selected ticker on your chart.
DASHBOARD:
The dashboard provides a live summary of all major components of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. It updates every candle and displays the current state of each requirement used in the setup logic.
🔹 Real-Time Model Components
The state of each component is displayed with the following:
✔️ = condition is satisfied
❌ = condition is not satisfied
🐂 / 🐻 = current directional bias (bullish or bearish)
The dashboard actively tracks the following:
◇ Bias (🐂 Bullish, 🐻 Bearish, or Both)
Shows the current bias with a bull or bear emoji. If using automatic bias, the dashboard updates as soon as the session logic determines a direction.
◇ Liquidity Sweep
Displays ✔️ once a valid BSL Sweep (for shorts) or SSL Sweep (for longs) is detected.
Shows ❌ when no sweep is present.
◇ V Shape Recovery
Displays ✔️ when a confirmed V shape recovery forms after the sweep.
Shows ❌ until a valid V shape appears.
◇ Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
Shows ✔️ once a bullish or bearish IFVG forms in the correct direction.
Shows ❌ when no IFVG has yet confirmed.
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
Displays ✔️ when price is currently inside any enabled HTF FVG or taps a HTF FVG during a liquidity sweep.
Displays ❌ when price is not inside a HTF imbalance.
◇ Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity (DOL)
Shows ✔️ when a clear opposite-side draw is present in the model logic.
Shows ❌ if no clear opposite draw is detected.
◇ SMT Divergence
Shows ✔️ for 20 candles immediately after an SMT Divergence forms.
After 20 candles, it returns to ❌ unless a new SMT Divergence is detected.
🔹 Signal Information Display
When a valid long or short signal appears, the dashboard expands to show the full details of the setup, including:
Signal Rating
Entry Price
Stop-Loss Price
Breakeven Price
Take Profit 1 Price
Take Profit 2 Price
🔹 Trade Statistics Module
Users can enable a built-in statistics panel to view historical performance of signals across all ratings. The trade stats include:
A Signal Win Rate
A+ Signal Win Rate
A++ Signal Win Rate
Long Signal Win Rate
Short Signal Win Rate
Total Number of Trades Used in the Calculations
A trade is counted as a win if price reaches breakeven before stop-loss. A trade is counted as a loss if price hits stop-loss before breakeven.
🔹 Dashboard Customization
The dashboard includes several options to control its appearance and position:
Show Dashboard: Toggle the entire dashboard on or off
Dashboard Size: Choose the size of the dashboard
Dashboard Position: Choose the location of the dashboard on the chart
Trade Stats Text Color: Customize the color of the 2nd column outputs under the Trade Stats section in the dashboard
◇ Component Toggles
Users can enable or disable the display of any model component based on preference. Each of these items can be shown or hidden independently:
Setup Rating
Entry
Stop-Loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1
Take Profit 2
Bias
Liquidity Sweep
Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
V Shape Recovery
Inversion FVG
Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity
Trade Stats
These toggles only affect visual display. Disabling any of them does not affect the underlying indicator’s logic.
ALERTS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model includes full alert functionality using AnyAlert(), allowing users to receive notifications in real time for all major model components and signal events.
Users can enable or disable each alert type in the “Alerts” section of the settings. After selecting which alerts they want active, they can create a single TradingView alert using the AnyAlert() condition. This will automatically trigger alerts for all enabled events as soon as they occur on the chart.
Available Alerts:
Long Signal
Short Signal
Breakeven Hit (BE)
Take Profit 1 Hit (TP1)
Take Profit 2 Hit (TP2)
Stop-Loss Hit (SL)
Liquidity Sweep Detected
SMT Divergence Detected
How to Receive Alerts:
Open the TradingView alert creation window.
Select the IFVG Model indicator as the alert condition.
Choose AnyAlert() from the condition dropdown.
Create the alert.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes such as the HTF FVGs, which can result in the following restriction:
Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features is very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
UNIQUENESS:
This indicator is unique because it organizes every part of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model into one structured, rules based system. It detects liquidity sweeps, confirms V shape recoveries, identifies valid IFVGs, checks higher timeframe FVG taps, reads macro timing, and applies a session based directional bias. All of these components are evaluated in a fixed sequence so users always know exactly why a signal appears. Every part of the logic is customizable, including which liquidity types are used, which IFVGs qualify for signals, which time windows allow trades, the minimum risk to reward for a setup, and all visual elements on the chart. The tool also includes optional SMT Divergence detection, daily and weekly opening gaps, a live dashboard that shows the state of each model requirement, and optional signal performance statistics.
[GetSparx] Nova Pro⚡ Nova Pro – Position Calculator
This indicator is a user-friendly TradingView indicator designed to help traders plan and visualize their entry and exit points, calculate position sizing, and instantly display key risk metrics. By simply entering three price levels (Entry, Take Profit and Stop Loss) along with a risk amount in USD, the indicator draws color-coded lines and labels on the chart, and generates a concise table with all computed values. This allows you to assess the risk-reward profile of any trade at a glance, without performing manual calculations.
⚙️ How It Works
When the indicator is added to the chart it will ask to specify the price inputs and the risk amount in USD.
Price Inputs (Entry, TP, SL)
• You specify three price levels: the entry price, the profit target (Take Profit) and the loss threshold (Stop Loss).
• Inputs use TradingView’s native price-picker fields. Any change is immediately reflected on the chart.
Visual Display
• Each level is plotted as a line stretching into the future for enough room.
• Labels on the right show the exact price, color-coded: orange for Entry, green for TP and red for SL.
• Previous lines and labels are automatically removed when parameters change, ensuring the chart remains clean.
Risk Calculations
• The entered risk amount (in USD) is combined with the distance between Entry and SL to compute the optimal number of units (Qty) to trade.
• The script automatically detects whether it’s a long or short trade based on the relative positions of Entry and TP.
• Note that the risk and reward calculations do not factor in exchange fees, slippage, funding rates or any other trading costs. Actual profit and loss may differ once transaction fees and market execution variances are applied, so be sure to adjust your position sizing and expectations accordingly.
🎯 What You Can Do With It
• Consistent Position Sizing
Automate your position size so you consistently risk the same dollar amount, regardless of price volatility or stop distance.
• Clear Risk Management
Instantly view your Reward-to-Risk ratio, potential profit in USD and exact risk amount, so you make well-informed decisions.
• Rapid Scenario Analysis
Adjust TP, SL or Entry on the fly to see how each change affects your potential profit, loss and RR ratio.
• Publication-Ready Charts
The visual elements and integrated table are optimized for TradingView publications, giving your analysis a professional, polished look.
📊 Explanation of Table Values
• Entry
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered entry price.
Marks the exact level at which you initiate the trade and serves as the reference point for all further risk and reward calculations.
• Quantity (Qty)
Calculation: Risk USD ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Determines how many units, contracts or shares to trade so that a stop-out at your SL equals exactly your predefined dollar risk, resulting in consistent per-trade exposure.
• Risk to Reward (RR)
Calculation: (Take Profit − Entry) ÷ (Entry − Stop Loss).
Expresses how many dollars of potential profit you target for each dollar you risk. Values above 1 mean the reward exceeds the risk, guiding you to favorable setups.
• Take Profit (TP)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered take-profit price.
Your target exit level for booking gains, highlighted in green on the chart. Shows where you plan to capture profits if the market moves in your favor.
• Profit
Calculation: Qty × (Take Profit − Entry).
Gives the absolute potential gain in USD if price reaches your TP. Useful for comparing total return across different instruments or setups.
• Stop Loss (SL)
Calculation: rounded to the nearest tick of your entered stop-loss price.
The level at which your trade is automatically closed to cap losses, highlighted in red on the chart. Ensures you never lose more than your defined risk amount.
• Risk
Calculation: equals the entered Risk USD.
The maximum dollar amount you’re willing to lose on this trade. Acts as the upper boundary for your exposure, keeping your position sizing disciplined.
📝 Examples
• Long Example 1: Bitcoin/USD
Entry: $11851.1
Take Profit: $123853.9
Stop Loss: $115467.7
Risk USD: $500
The Risk to Reward ratio results in 2.25, which means the reward exceeds the risk.
For each dollar you risk, this setup has potential gains of 2.25 dollars.
• Long Example 2: Algorand/USD
Entry: $0.2919
Take Profit: $0.3491
Stop Loss: $0.2655
Risk USD: $1000
The Risk to Reward ratio on this trade results in 2.17 and has a potential profit target of $2166.67. With a risk of $1000 USD the table conveniently shows a quantity of 37878 ALGO is needed for the trade.
• Short Example 1: Forex EUR/USD
Entry: $1.16666
Take Profit: $1.15459
Stop Loss: $1.17374
Risk USD: $200
With a risk of $200 USD and a RR of 2.17, this example shows how a short trade can be accomplished on EUR/USD.
• Short Example 2: Gold
Entry: $3366.29
Take Profit: $3272.01
Stop Loss: $3386.87
Risk USD: $1500
Within this short setup a risk of $1500 USD is used, which results in a RR of 4.58. The potential profit for this trade is $6871.72.
⚠ Disclaimer
This tool is for educational and analytical use only. It does not provide financial advice or trading signals. Always use proper risk management and do your own due diligence.
Scout Regiment - MACD# Scout Regiment - MACD Indicator
## English Documentation
### Overview
Scout Regiment - MACD is an advanced implementation of the Moving Average Convergence Divergence indicator with enhanced features including dual divergence detection (histogram and MACD line), customizable moving average types, multi-timeframe analysis, and sophisticated visual elements. This indicator provides traders with comprehensive momentum analysis and high-probability reversal signals.
### What is MACD?
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a trend-following momentum indicator that shows the relationship between two moving averages:
- **MACD Line**: Difference between fast and slow EMAs
- **Signal Line**: Moving average of the MACD line
- **Histogram**: Difference between MACD line and signal line
- **Purpose**: Identifies trend direction, momentum strength, and potential reversals
### Key Features
#### 1. **Enhanced MACD Display**
**Three Core Components:**
**MACD Line** (Default: Blue/Orange, 2px)
- Fast EMA (13) minus Slow EMA (34)
- Shows momentum direction
- Color changes based on position relative to signal line:
- Blue: Above signal line (bullish)
- Orange: Below signal line (bearish)
- Can be toggled on/off
**Signal Line** (Default: White/Blue with transparency, 2px)
- EMA (9) of the MACD line
- Serves as trigger line for crossover signals
- Color varies based on settings
- Essential for identifying entry/exit points
**Histogram** (Default: 4-color gradient, 4px columns)
- Difference between MACD and signal line
- Visual representation of momentum strength
- Advanced 4-color scheme:
- **Dark Green (#26A69A)**: Positive and increasing (strong bullish)
- **Light Green (#B2DFDB)**: Positive but decreasing (weakening bullish)
- **Dark Red (#FF5252)**: Negative and decreasing (strong bearish)
- **Light Red (#FFCDD2)**: Negative but increasing (weakening bearish)
- Histogram tells the "story" of momentum changes
#### 2. **Customizable Moving Average Types**
**Oscillator MA Type** (MACD Line calculation):
- **EMA** (Exponential) - Default, more responsive
- **SMA** (Simple) - Smoother, less responsive
**Signal Line MA Type**:
- **EMA** (Exponential) - Default, faster signals
- **SMA** (Simple) - Slower, fewer false signals
**Flexibility**: Mix and match for different trading styles
- EMA/EMA: Most responsive (day trading)
- SMA/SMA: Smoothest (swing trading)
- EMA/SMA or SMA/EMA: Balanced approaches
#### 3. **Multi-Timeframe Capability**
**Current Chart Period** (Default: Enabled)
- Uses current timeframe automatically
- Simplest option for most traders
**Custom Timeframe Selection**
- Calculate MACD on any timeframe
- Display higher timeframe MACD on lower timeframe charts
- Example: View 1H MACD on 15min chart
- **Use Case**: Align lower timeframe trades with higher timeframe momentum
#### 4. **Visual Enhancement Features**
**Golden Cross / Death Cross Markers**
- Circles mark crossover points
- Color matches MACD line color
- Clearly identifies entry/exit signals
- Can be toggled on/off
**Zero Line** (White, 2px solid)
- Reference for positive/negative momentum
- Critical level for trend identification
- MACD above zero = Bullish bias
- MACD below zero = Bearish bias
**Color Transitions**
- MACD line changes color at signal line crosses
- Histogram shows momentum acceleration/deceleration
- Provides early warning of trend changes
#### 5. **Dual Divergence Detection System**
This indicator features TWO separate divergence detection systems:
**A. Histogram Divergence Detection**
- **Purpose**: Earlier divergence signals (most sensitive)
- **Detects**: Regular bullish and bearish divergences
- **Label**: "H涨" (Histogram Up), "H跌" (Histogram Down)
- **Special Feature**: Same-sign requirement option
- Top divergence: Both histogram points must be positive
- Bottom divergence: Both histogram points must be negative
- Filters out less reliable divergences
**B. MACD Line Divergence Detection**
- **Purpose**: Stronger, more reliable divergences
- **Detects**: Regular bullish and bearish divergences
- **Label**: "M涨" (MACD Up), "M跌" (MACD Down)
- **Use**: Confirmation of histogram divergences or standalone
**Divergence Types Explained:**
**Regular Bullish Divergence (Yellow)**
- **Price**: Lower lows
- **Indicator**: Higher lows (histogram OR MACD line)
- **Signal**: Potential upward reversal
- **Best**: Near support levels, oversold conditions
- **Entry**: After price breaks above recent resistance
**Regular Bearish Divergence (Blue)**
- **Price**: Higher highs
- **Indicator**: Lower highs (histogram OR MACD line)
- **Signal**: Potential downward reversal
- **Best**: Near resistance levels, overbought conditions
- **Entry**: After price breaks below recent support
#### 6. **Advanced Divergence Parameters**
**Histogram Divergence Settings:**
- **Price Reference**: Wicks (default) or Bodies
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 2)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between divergences (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between divergences (default: 5)
- **Same Sign Requirement**: Ensures both histogram points have same sign
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Toggle display
- **Show Labels**: Toggle divergence labels
**MACD Line Divergence Settings:**
- **Price Reference**: Wicks (default) or Bodies
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 1)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between divergences (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between divergences (default: 5)
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Toggle display
- **Show Labels**: Toggle divergence labels
**Independent Control**: Adjust histogram and MACD line divergences separately
### Configuration Settings
#### MACD Basic Settings
- **Fast EMA Period**: Fast moving average length (default: 13)
- **Slow EMA Period**: Slow moving average length (default: 34)
- **Signal Line Period**: Signal line length (default: 9)
- **Use Current Chart Period**: Auto-adjust to current timeframe
- **Select Period**: Choose custom timeframe
- **Show MACD & Signal Lines**: Toggle lines display
- **Show Cross Markers**: Toggle golden/death cross dots
- **Show Histogram**: Toggle histogram display
- **Show Crossover Color Change**: Enable MACD line color change
- **Show Histogram Colors**: Enable 4-color histogram scheme
- **Oscillator MA Type**: Choose SMA or EMA for MACD
- **Signal Line MA Type**: Choose SMA or EMA for signal
#### Histogram Divergence Settings
- **Show Histogram Divergence**: Enable histogram divergence detection
- **Price Reference**: Wicks or Bodies for price comparison
- **Right/Left Lookback**: Pivot detection parameters
- **Max/Min Range**: Distance constraints between pivots
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Display histogram divergence lines
- **Show Labels**: Display histogram divergence labels
- **Require Same Sign**: Enforce histogram sign consistency
#### MACD Line Divergence Settings
- **Show MACD Line Divergence**: Enable MACD line divergence detection
- **Price Reference**: Wicks or Bodies for price comparison
- **Right/Left Lookback**: Pivot detection parameters
- **Max/Min Range**: Distance constraints between pivots
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Display MACD line divergence lines
- **Show Labels**: Display MACD line divergence labels
### How to Use
#### For Basic Trend Following
1. **Enable Core Components**
- MACD line, signal line, and histogram
- Enable cross markers
2. **Identify Trend**
- MACD above zero = Uptrend
- MACD below zero = Downtrend
3. **Watch for Crossovers**
- Golden cross (MACD crosses above signal) = Buy signal
- Death cross (MACD crosses below signal) = Sell signal
4. **Confirm with Histogram**
- Increasing histogram = Strengthening trend
- Decreasing histogram = Weakening trend
#### For Divergence Trading
1. **Enable Both Divergence Systems**
- Histogram divergence (early signals)
- MACD line divergence (confirmation)
2. **Wait for Divergence Signals**
- "H涨" or "H跌" = Early warning
- "M涨" or "M跌" = Confirmation
3. **Best Divergences**
- Both histogram AND MACD line showing divergence
- Divergence at key support/resistance levels
- Multiple divergences on same trend
4. **Entry Timing**
- Wait for price structure break
- Enter on pullback after confirmation
- Use MACD crossover as trigger
#### For Multi-Timeframe Analysis
1. **Set Higher Timeframe**
- Example: 4H MACD on 1H chart
- Uncheck "Use Current Chart Period"
- Select desired timeframe
2. **Identify Higher TF Trend**
- MACD position relative to zero
- MACD vs signal line relationship
3. **Trade with HTF Direction**
- Only take long signals if HTF MACD bullish
- Only take short signals if HTF MACD bearish
4. **Use Current TF for Entries**
- Higher TF for bias
- Current TF for precise timing
#### For Histogram Analysis
1. **Enable 4-Color Histogram**
- Watch color transitions
- Dark colors = Strong momentum
- Light colors = Weakening momentum
2. **Momentum Stages**
- Dark green → Light green = Bullish losing steam
- Light red → Dark red = Bearish gaining strength
3. **Trade Transitions**
- Light green to light red = Momentum shift (potential reversal)
- Entry on confirmation crossover
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: Classic MACD Crossover
**Setup:**
- Standard settings (13/34/9)
- Enable MACD, signal line, and cross markers
- Clear trend on higher timeframe
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Golden cross (circle marker) above zero line
- **Short**: Death cross (circle marker) below zero line
**Confirmation:**
- Histogram color supporting direction
- Volume increase helps
**Stop Loss:**
- Below recent swing low (long)
- Above recent swing high (short)
**Exit:**
- Opposite crossover
- MACD crosses zero line against position
**Best For:** Trend following, clear trending markets
#### Strategy 2: Zero Line Bounce
**Setup:**
- Enable all components
- Established trend (MACD staying one side of zero)
- Wait for pullback to zero line
**Entry:**
- **Long**: MACD touches zero from above, bounces up with golden cross
- **Short**: MACD touches zero from below, bounces down with death cross
**Confirmation:**
- Histogram color change
- Price at support/resistance
**Stop Loss:**
- Just beyond zero line (opposite side)
**Exit:**
- Target previous extreme
- Or opposite crossover
**Best For:** Trend continuation, strong markets
#### Strategy 3: Dual Divergence Confirmation
**Setup:**
- Enable both histogram and MACD line divergences
- Price at extreme (high/low)
- Wait for divergence signals
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Both "H涨" AND "M涨" labels appear
- **Short**: Both "H跌" AND "M跌" labels appear
**Confirmation:**
- Price breaks structure
- Volume increase
- Golden/death cross confirms
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond divergence pivot point
**Exit:**
- MACD crosses zero line
- Or opposite divergence appears
**Best For:** Reversal trading, swing trading
#### Strategy 4: Histogram Color Transition
**Setup:**
- Enable 4-color histogram
- Focus on color changes
- Price in trend
**Entry:**
- **Long**: Light red → Light green transition + golden cross
- **Short**: Light green → Light red transition + death cross
**Rationale:**
- Light colors show momentum exhaustion
- Color flip = momentum shift
- Early entry before full trend reversal
**Stop Loss:**
- Recent swing point
**Exit:**
- Histogram color turns light against position
- Or at predetermined target
**Best For:** Scalping, day trading, early entries
#### Strategy 5: Multi-Timeframe Momentum
**Setup:**
- Display higher timeframe MACD (e.g., 4H on 1H chart)
- Current chart shows current momentum
- Higher TF shows overall bias
**Entry:**
- **Long**: HTF MACD above zero + current TF golden cross
- **Short**: HTF MACD below zero + current TF death cross
**Confirmation:**
- HTF histogram supporting direction
- Both timeframes aligned
**Stop Loss:**
- Based on current timeframe structure
**Exit:**
- Current TF opposite crossover
- Or HTF MACD momentum weakens
**Best For:** Swing trading, high-probability setups
#### Strategy 6: Histogram-Only Divergence Scout
**Setup:**
- Enable only histogram divergence
- Use "same sign requirement"
- Focus on early signals
**Entry:**
- **Long**: "H涨" label + price at support
- **Short**: "H跌" label + price at resistance
**Confirmation:**
- Wait for MACD/signal crossover
- Or price structure break
**Advantage:**
- Earliest divergence signals
- Get in before crowd
**Risk:**
- More false signals than MACD line divergence
- Requires strict confirmation
**Stop Loss:**
- Tight stop beyond entry bar
**Exit:**
- Quick targets (30-50% of expected move)
- Or trail stop
**Best For:** Active traders, scalpers seeking early entries
### Best Practices
#### MACD Period Selection
**Standard (13/34/9)** - Default
- Balanced for most markets
- Good for day trading and swing trading
- Widely used, works with general market psychology
**Faster (8/21/5 or 12/26/9)**
- More responsive
- More signals, more noise
- Best for: Scalping, volatile markets
- Risk: More false signals
**Slower (21/55/13)**
- Smoother signals
- Fewer but stronger signals
- Best for: Swing trading, position trading
- Benefit: Higher reliability
#### Histogram vs MACD Line Divergences
**Histogram Divergence:**
- ✅ Earlier signals
- ✅ Catch moves before others
- ❌ More false signals
- ❌ Requires confirmation
- **Best for**: Active traders, scalpers
**MACD Line Divergence:**
- ✅ More reliable
- ✅ Stronger divergences
- ❌ Later signals
- ❌ May miss early moves
- **Best for**: Swing traders, conservative traders
**Both Together:**
- ✅ Maximum confidence
- ✅ Histogram for alert, MACD for confirmation
- ✅ Highest probability setups
- **Best for**: All traders seeking quality over quantity
#### Same Sign Requirement Feature
**Enabled (Recommended):**
- Filters low-quality divergences
- Top divergence: Both histogram points positive
- Bottom divergence: Both histogram points negative
- Results in fewer but more reliable signals
**Disabled:**
- More divergence signals
- Includes zero-line crossing divergences
- Higher false signal rate
- Only for experienced traders
#### Price Reference: Wicks vs Bodies
**Wicks (Default):**
- Uses high/low prices
- Catches all extremes
- More divergences detected
- Best for: Most trading styles
**Bodies:**
- Uses open/close prices
- Filters out spike movements
- Fewer but cleaner divergences
- Best for: Noisy markets, crypto
#### Visual Settings Recommendations
**For Beginners:**
- Enable: MACD line, signal line, histogram
- Enable: Cross markers
- Enable: Histogram colors
- Disable: Both divergence systems initially
- Focus: Learn basic crossovers first
**For Intermediate:**
- All basic components
- Add: Histogram divergence only
- Use: Same sign requirement
- Focus: Early reversal signals
**For Advanced:**
- All components
- Both divergence systems
- Custom parameters per market
- Multi-timeframe analysis
- Focus: High-probability confluence setups
### Indicator Combinations
**With Moving Averages (EMAs):**
- EMAs (21/55/144) show trend
- MACD shows momentum
- Enter when both align
- Exit when MACD turns first
**With RSI:**
- RSI for overbought/oversold
- MACD for momentum confirmation
- Divergence on both = Extremely strong signal
- RSI + MACD divergence = High probability trade
**With Volume:**
- Volume confirms MACD signals
- Crossover + volume spike = Valid breakout
- Divergence + volume divergence = Strong reversal
**With Support/Resistance:**
- S/R levels for entry/exit targets
- MACD divergence at levels = Highest probability
- MACD crossover at level = Strong confirmation
**With Bias Indicator:**
- Bias shows price deviation from EMA
- MACD shows momentum
- Both diverging = Powerful reversal signal
- Bias extreme + MACD divergence = High conviction trade
**With OBV:**
- OBV shows volume trend
- MACD shows price momentum
- OBV + MACD divergence = Volume not supporting price
- Strong reversal indication
**With KSI (RSI/CCI):**
- KSI for oscillator extremes
- MACD for momentum direction
- KSI extreme + MACD divergence = Reversal likely
- All aligned = Maximum confidence
### Common MACD Patterns
1. **Bullish Cross Above Zero**: Strong uptrend continuation signal
2. **Bearish Cross Below Zero**: Strong downtrend continuation signal
3. **Zero Line Rejection**: Price respects zero as support/resistance
4. **Histogram Peak**: Momentum climax, watch for reversal
5. **Double Divergence**: Two divergences without reversal = Very strong signal when it finally reverses
6. **Histogram Convergence**: Histogram narrowing = Trend losing steam
7. **Signal Line Hug**: MACD stays close to signal = Consolidation, expect breakout
### Performance Tips
- Start with default settings (13/34/9 EMA/EMA)
- Test one divergence system at a time
- Use same sign requirement initially
- Enable cross markers for clear signals
- Adjust lookback parameters per market volatility
- Higher timeframe MACD more reliable than lower
- Combine histogram early signal with MACD line confirmation
- Don't trade every divergence - wait for best setups
### Alert Conditions
While not explicitly coded, you can set custom alerts on:
- MACD crossing above/below signal line
- MACD crossing above/below zero line
- Histogram crossing zero
- When divergence labels appear (using visual alerts)
---
## 中文说明文档
### 概述
Scout Regiment - MACD 是移动平均线收敛发散指标的高级实现版本，具有增强功能，包括双重背离检测（直方图和MACD线）、可自定义的移动平均类型、多时间框架分析和复杂的视觉元素。该指标为交易者提供全面的动量分析和高概率反转信号。
### 什么是MACD？
MACD（移动平均线收敛发散）是一个趋势跟随动量指标，显示两条移动平均线之间的关系：
- **MACD线**：快速和慢速EMA之间的差值
- **信号线**：MACD线的移动平均
- **直方图**：MACD线和信号线之间的差值
- **用途**：识别趋势方向、动量强度和潜在反转
### 核心功能
#### 1. **增强的MACD显示**
**三个核心组件：**
**MACD线**（默认：蓝色/橙色，2像素）
- 快速EMA（13）减去慢速EMA（34）
- 显示动量方向
- 根据相对于信号线的位置改变颜色：
- 蓝色：信号线上方（看涨）
- 橙色：信号线下方（看跌）
- 可开关显示
**信号线**（默认：白色/蓝色带透明度，2像素）
- MACD线的EMA（9）
- 作为交叉信号的触发线
- 颜色根据设置变化
- 识别进出场点的关键
**直方图**（默认：4色渐变，4像素柱）
- MACD和信号线之间的差值
- 动量强度的视觉表示
- 高级4色方案：
- **深绿色（#26A69A）**：正值且增加（强劲看涨）
- **浅绿色（#B2DFDB）**：正值但减少（看涨减弱）
- **深红色（#FF5252）**：负值且减少（强劲看跌）
- **浅红色（#FFCDD2）**：负值但增加（看跌减弱）
- 直方图讲述动量变化的"故事"
#### 2. **可自定义的移动平均类型**
**振荡器MA类型**（MACD线计算）：
- **EMA**（指数）- 默认，反应更快
- **SMA**（简单）- 更平滑，反应较慢
**信号线MA类型**：
- **EMA**（指数）- 默认，更快信号
- **SMA**（简单）- 更慢，假信号更少
**灵活性**：混合搭配以适应不同交易风格
- EMA/EMA：最灵敏（日内交易）
- SMA/SMA：最平滑（波段交易）
- EMA/SMA或SMA/EMA：平衡方法
#### 3. **多时间框架功能**
**当前图表周期**（默认：启用）
- 自动使用当前时间框架
- 大多数交易者的最简单选项
**自定义时间框架选择**
- 在任何时间框架上计算MACD
- 在低时间框架图表上显示高时间框架MACD
- 示例：在15分钟图上查看1小时MACD
- **使用场景**：使低时间框架交易与高时间框架动量保持一致
#### 4. **视觉增强功能**
**金叉/死叉标记**
- 圆点标记交叉点
- 颜色与MACD线颜色匹配
- 清晰识别进出场信号
- 可开关
**零线**（白色，2像素实线）
- 正负动量的参考
- 趋势识别的关键水平
- MACD在零线上方 = 看涨偏向
- MACD在零线下方 = 看跌偏向
**颜色转换**
- MACD线在信号线交叉处改变颜色
- 直方图显示动量加速/减速
- 提供趋势变化的早期警告
#### 5. **双重背离检测系统**
该指标具有两个独立的背离检测系统：
**A. 直方图背离检测**
- **用途**：更早的背离信号（最敏感）
- **检测**：常规看涨和看跌背离
- **标签**："H涨"（直方图上涨）、"H跌"（直方图下跌）
- **特殊功能**：同符号要求选项
- 顶背离：两个直方图点都必须为正
- 底背离：两个直方图点都必须为负
- 过滤不太可靠的背离
**B. MACD线背离检测**
- **用途**：更强、更可靠的背离
- **检测**：常规看涨和看跌背离
- **标签**："M涨"（MACD上涨）、"M跌"（MACD下跌）
- **用途**：确认直方图背离或独立使用
**背离类型说明：**
**常规看涨背离（黄色）**
- **价格**：更低的低点
- **指标**：更高的低点（直方图或MACD线）
- **信号**：潜在向上反转
- **最佳**：在支撑水平附近、超卖状况
- **入场**：价格突破近期阻力后
**常规看跌背离（蓝色）**
- **价格**：更高的高点
- **指标**：更低的高点（直方图或MACD线）
- **信号**：潜在向下反转
- **最佳**：在阻力水平附近、超买状况
- **入场**：价格跌破近期支撑后
#### 6. **高级背离参数**
**直方图背离设置：**
- **价格参考**：影线（默认）或实体
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：2）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：背离之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：背离之间最小K线数（默认：5）
- **同符号要求**：确保两个直方图点符号相同
- **显示常规背离**：切换显示
- **显示标签**：切换背离标签
**MACD线背离设置：**
- **价格参考**：影线（默认）或实体
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：1）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：背离之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：背离之间最小K线数（默认：5）
- **显示常规背离**：切换显示
- **显示标签**：切换背离标签
**独立控制**：分别调整直方图和MACD线背离
### 配置设置
#### MACD基础设置
- **快速EMA周期**：快速移动平均长度（默认：13）
- **慢速EMA周期**：慢速移动平均长度（默认：34）
- **信号线周期**：信号线长度（默认：9）
- **使用当前图表周期**：自动调整到当前时间框架
- **选择周期**：选择自定义时间框架
- **显示MACD线和信号线**：切换线条显示
- **显示金叉死叉圆点标记**：切换金叉/死叉圆点
- **显示直方图**：切换直方图显示
- **显示穿越变化MACD线**：启用MACD线颜色变化
- **显示直方图颜色**：启用4色直方图方案
- **振荡器MA类型**：为MACD选择SMA或EMA
- **信号线MA类型**：为信号线选择SMA或EMA
#### 直方图背离设置
- **显示直方图背离信号**：启用直方图背离检测
- **价格参考**：影线或实体用于价格比较
- **右侧/左侧回溯**：枢轴检测参数
- **最大/最小范围**：枢轴之间的距离约束
- **显示直方图常规背离**：显示直方图背离线
- **显示直方图常规背离标签**：显示直方图背离标签
- **要求背离点柱状图同符号**：强制直方图符号一致性
#### MACD线背离设置
- **显示MACD线背离信号**：启用MACD线背离检测
- **价格参考**：影线或实体用于价格比较
- **右侧/左侧回溯**：枢轴检测参数
- **最大/最小范围**：枢轴之间的距离约束
- **显示线常规背离**：显示MACD线背离线
- **显示线常规背离标签**：显示MACD线背离标签
### 使用方法
#### 基础趋势跟随
1. **启用核心组件**
- MACD线、信号线和直方图
- 启用交叉标记
2. **识别趋势**
- MACD在零线上方 = 上升趋势
- MACD在零线下方 = 下降趋势
3. **观察交叉**
- 金叉（MACD向上穿越信号线）= 买入信号
- 死叉（MACD向下穿越信号线）= 卖出信号
4. **用直方图确认**
- 直方图增加 = 趋势加强
- 直方图减少 = 趋势减弱
#### 背离交易
1. **启用两个背离系统**
- 直方图背离（早期信号）
- MACD线背离（确认）
2. **等待背离信号**
- "H涨"或"H跌" = 早期警告
- "M涨"或"M跌" = 确认
3. **最佳背离**
- 直方图和MACD线都显示背离
- 在关键支撑/阻力水平的背离
- 同一趋势上多个背离
4. **入场时机**
- 等待价格结构突破
- 确认后回调时进入
- 使用MACD交叉作为触发
#### 多时间框架分析
1. **设置更高时间框架**
- 示例：在1小时图上显示4小时MACD
- 取消勾选"使用当前图表周期"
- 选择所需时间框架
2. **识别更高TF趋势**
- MACD相对于零线的位置
- MACD与信号线的关系
3. **顺HTF方向交易**
- 仅在HTF MACD看涨时接受多头信号
- 仅在HTF MACD看跌时接受空头信号
4. **使用当前TF入场**
- 更高TF确定偏向
- 当前TF精确定时
#### 直方图分析
1. **启用4色直方图**
- 观察颜色转换
- 深色 = 强动量
- 浅色 = 动量减弱
2. **动量阶段**
- 深绿色→浅绿色 = 看涨失去动力
- 浅红色→深红色 = 看跌获得力量
3. **交易转换**
- 浅绿色到浅红色 = 动量转变（潜在反转）
- 确认交叉时入场
### 交易策略
#### 策略1：经典MACD交叉
**设置：**
- 标准设置（13/34/9）
- 启用MACD、信号线和交叉标记
- 更高时间框架明确趋势
**入场：**
- **多头**：零线上方金叉（圆点标记）
- **空头**：零线下方死叉（圆点标记）
**确认：**
- 直方图颜色支持方向
- 成交量增加有帮助
**止损：**
- 近期波动低点之下（多头）
- 近期波动高点之上（空头）
**离场：**
- 相反交叉
- MACD反向穿越零线
**适合：**趋势跟随、明确趋势市场
#### 策略2：零线反弹
**设置：**
- 启用所有组件
- 已建立趋势（MACD保持在零线一侧）
- 等待回调至零线
**入场：**
- **多头**：MACD从上方触及零线，向上反弹并金叉
- **空头**：MACD从下方触及零线，向下反弹并死叉
**确认：**
- 直方图颜色变化
- 价格在支撑/阻力位
**止损：**
- 零线对面一侧
**离场：**
- 目标前一极值
- 或相反交叉
**适合：**趋势延续、强势市场
#### 策略3：双重背离确认
**设置：**
- 启用直方图和MACD线背离
- 价格在极值（高点/低点）
- 等待背离信号
**入场：**
- **多头**："H涨"和"M涨"标签都出现
- **空头**："H跌"和"M跌"标签都出现
**确认：**
- 价格突破结构
- 成交量增加
- 金叉/死叉确认
**止损：**
- 背离枢轴点之外
**离场：**
- MACD穿越零线
- 或出现相反背离
**适合：**反转交易、波段交易
#### 策略4：直方图颜色转换
**设置：**
- 启用4色直方图
- 关注颜色变化
- 价格处于趋势
**入场：**
- **多头**：浅红色→浅绿色转换 + 金叉
- **空头**：浅绿色→浅红色转换 + 死叉
**原理：**
- 浅色显示动量衰竭
- 颜色翻转 = 动量转变
- 完全趋势反转前的早期入场
**止损：**
- 近期波动点
**离场：**
- 直方图颜色变为反向浅色
- 或预定目标
**适合：**剥头皮、日内交易、早期入场
#### 策略5：多时间框架动量
**设置：**
- 显示更高时间框架MACD（例如，在1小时图上显示4小时）
- 当前图表显示当前动量
- 更高TF显示整体偏向
**入场：**
- **多头**：HTF MACD在零线上方 + 当前TF金叉
- **空头**：HTF MACD在零线下方 + 当前TF死叉
**确认：**
- HTF直方图支持方向
- 两个时间框架对齐
**止损：**
- 基于当前时间框架结构
**离场：**
- 当前TF相反交叉
- 或HTF MACD动量减弱
**适合：**波段交易、高概率设置
#### 策略6：仅直方图背离侦察
**设置：**
- 仅启用直方图背离
- 使用"同符号要求"
- 关注早期信号
**入场：**
- **多头**："H涨"标签 + 价格在支撑位
- **空头**："H跌"标签 + 价格在阻力位
**确认：**
- 等待MACD/信号线交叉
- 或价格结构突破
**优势：**
- 最早的背离信号
- 在大众之前进入
**风险：**
- 比MACD线背离假信号更多
- 需要严格确认
**止损：**
- 入场K线之外紧密止损
**离场：**
- 快速目标（预期波动的30-50%）
- 或移动止损
**适合：**活跃交易者、寻求早期入场的剥头皮交易者
### 最佳实践
#### MACD周期选择
**标准（13/34/9）** - 默认
- 大多数市场的平衡
- 适合日内交易和波段交易
- 广泛使用，符合一般市场心理
**更快（8/21/5或12/26/9）**
- 更灵敏
- 更多信号，更多噪音
- 最适合：剥头皮、波动市场
- 风险：更多假信号
**更慢（21/55/13）**
- 更平滑的信号
- 信号较少但更强
- 最适合：波段交易、仓位交易
- 优势：更高可靠性
#### 直方图vs MACD线背离
**直方图背离：**
- ✅ 更早信号
- ✅ 在其他人之前捕捉波动
- ❌ 更多假信号
- ❌ 需要确认
- **最适合**：活跃交易者、剥头皮交易者
**MACD线背离：**
- ✅ 更可靠
- ✅ 更强的背离
- ❌ 信号较晚
- ❌ 可能错过早期波动
- **最适合**：波段交易者、保守交易者
**两者结合：**
- ✅ 最大信心
- ✅ 直方图警报，MACD确认
- ✅ 最高概率设置
- **最适合**：所有寻求质量而非数量的交易者
#### 同符号要求功能
**启用（推荐）：**
- 过滤低质量背离
- 顶背离：两个直方图点都为正
- 底背离：两个直方图点都为负
- 产生更少但更可靠的信号
**禁用：**
- 更多背离信号
- 包括零线穿越背离
- 假信号率更高
- 仅适合有经验的交易者
#### 价格参考：影线vs实体
**影线（默认）：**
- 使用最高/最低价
- 捕捉所有极值
- 检测到更多背离
- 最适合：大多数交易风格
**实体：**
- 使用开盘/收盘价
- 过滤突刺波动
- 背离更少但更干净
- 最适合：噪音市场、加密货币
#### 视觉设置建议
**新手：**
- 启用：MACD线、信号线、直方图
- 启用：交叉标记
- 启用：直方图颜色
- 禁用：初始禁用两个背离系统
- 重点：先学习基本交叉
**中级：**
- 所有基本组件
- 添加：仅直方图背离
- 使用：同符号要求
- 重点：早期反转信号
**高级：**
- 所有组件
- 两个背离系统
- 每个市场自定义参数
- 多时间框架分析
- 重点：高概率汇合设置
### 指标组合
**与移动平均线（EMA）配合：**
- EMA（21/55/144）显示趋势
- MACD显示动量
- 两者一致时进入
- MACD先转向时退出
**与RSI配合：**
- RSI用于超买超卖
- MACD用于动量确认
- 两者都背离 = 极强信号
- RSI + MACD背离 = 高概率交易
**与成交量配合：**
- 成交量确认MACD信号
- 交叉 + 成交量激增 = 有效突破
- 背离 + 成交量背离 = 强反转
**与支撑/阻力配合：**
- 支撑阻力水平用于进出目标
- 水平处的MACD背离 = 最高概率
- 水平处的MACD交叉 = 强确认
**与Bias指标配合：**
- Bias显示价格相对EMA的偏离
- MACD显示动量
- 两者都背离 = 强大反转信号
- Bias极值 + MACD背离 = 高信念交易
**与OBV配合：**
- OBV显示成交量趋势
- MACD显示价格动量
- OBV + MACD背离 = 成交量不支持价格
- 强反转迹象
**与KSI（RSI/CCI）配合：**
- KSI用于振荡器极值
- MACD用于动量方向
- KSI极值 + MACD背离 = 可能反转
- 全部对齐 = 最大信心
### 常见MACD形态
1. **零线上方看涨交叉**：强上升趋势延续信号
2. **零线下方看跌交叉**：强下降趋势延续信号
3. **零线拒绝**：价格将零线作为支撑/阻力
4. **直方图峰值**：动量高潮，注意反转
5. **双重背离**：两次背离未反转 = 最终反转时非常强
6. **直方图收敛**：直方图变窄 = 趋势失去动力
7. **信号线紧贴**：MACD紧贴信号线 = 盘整，预期突破
### 性能提示
- 从默认设置开始（13/34/9 EMA/EMA）
- 一次测试一个背离系统
- 初始使用同符号要求
- 启用交叉标记以获得清晰信号
- 根据市场波动性调整回溯参数
- 更高时间框架MACD比更低的更可靠
- 结合直方图早期信号与MACD线确认
- 不要交易每个背离 - 等待最佳设置
### 警报条件
虽然没有明确编码，但您可以设置自定义警报：
- MACD向上/向下穿越信号线
- MACD向上/向下穿越零线
- 直方图穿越零线
- 背离标签出现时（使用视觉警报）
---
## Technical Support
For questions or issues, please refer to the TradingView community or contact the indicator creator.
## 技术支持
如有问题，请参考TradingView社区或联系指标创建者。
Scout Regiment - KSI# Scout Regiment - KSI Indicator
## English Documentation
### Overview
Scout Regiment - KSI (Key Stochastic Indicators) is a comprehensive momentum oscillator that combines three powerful technical indicators - RSI, CCI, and Williams %R - into a single, unified display. This multi-indicator approach provides traders with diverse perspectives on market momentum, overbought/oversold conditions, and potential reversal points through advanced divergence detection.
### What is KSI?
KSI stands for "Key Stochastic Indicators" - a composite momentum indicator that:
- Displays multiple oscillators normalized to a 0-100 scale
- Uses standardized bands (20/50/80) for consistent interpretation
- Combines RSI for trend, CCI for cycle, and Williams %R for reversal detection
- Provides enhanced divergence detection specifically for RSI
### Key Features
#### 1. **Triple Oscillator System**
**① RSI (Relative Strength Index)** - Primary Indicator
- **Purpose**: Measures momentum and identifies overbought/oversold conditions
- **Default Length**: 22 periods
- **Display**: Blue line (2px)
- **Key Levels**:
- Above 50: Bullish momentum
- Below 50: Bearish momentum
- Above 80: Overbought
- Below 20: Oversold
- **Special Features**:
- Background color indication (green/red)
- Crossover labels at 50 level
- Full divergence detection (4 types)
**② CCI (Commodity Channel Index)** - Dual Period
- **Purpose**: Identifies cyclical trends and extreme conditions
- **Dual Display**:
- CCI(33): Short-term cycle - Green line (1px)
- CCI(77): Medium-term cycle - Orange line (1px)
- **Default Source**: HLC3 (typical price)
- **Normalized Scale**: Mapped from ±100 to 0-100 for consistency
- **Interpretation**:
- Above 80: Strong upward momentum
- Below 20: Strong downward momentum
- 50 level: Neutral
- Divergence between periods: Trend change warning
**③ Williams %R** - Optional
- **Purpose**: Identifies overbought/oversold extremes
- **Default Length**: 28 periods
- **Display**: Magenta line (2px)
- **Scale**: Inverted and normalized to 0-100
- **Best For**: Short-term reversal signals
- **Default**: Disabled (enable when needed for extra confirmation)
#### 2. **Standardized Band System**
**Three-Level Structure:**
- **Upper Band (80)**: Overbought zone
- Strong momentum area
- Watch for reversal signals
- Divergences here are most reliable
- **Middle Line (50)**: Equilibrium
- Separates bullish/bearish zones
- Crossovers indicate momentum shifts
- Key decision level
- **Lower Band (20)**: Oversold zone
- Weak momentum area
- Look for bounce signals
- Divergences here signal potential reversals
**Band Fill**: Dark background between 20-80 for visual clarity
#### 3. **RSI Visual Enhancements**
**Background Color Indication**
- Green background: RSI above 50 (bullish bias)
- Red background: RSI below 50 (bearish bias)
- Optional display for cleaner charts
- Helps identify overall momentum direction
**Crossover Labels**
- "突破" (Breakout): RSI crosses above 50
- "跌破" (Breakdown): RSI crosses below 50
- Marks momentum shift points
- Can be toggled on/off
#### 4. **Advanced RSI Divergence Detection**
The indicator includes comprehensive divergence detection for RSI only (most reliable oscillator):
**Regular Bullish Divergence (Yellow)**
- **Price**: Lower lows
- **RSI**: Higher lows
- **Signal**: Potential upward reversal
- **Label**: "涨" (Up)
- **Most Common**: Near oversold levels (below 30)
**Regular Bearish Divergence (Blue)**
- **Price**: Higher highs
- **RSI**: Lower highs
- **Signal**: Potential downward reversal
- **Label**: "跌" (Down)
- **Most Common**: Near overbought levels (above 70)
**Hidden Bullish Divergence (Light Yellow)**
- **Price**: Higher lows
- **RSI**: Lower lows
- **Signal**: Uptrend continuation
- **Label**: "隐涨" (Hidden Up)
- **Use**: Add to existing longs
**Hidden Bearish Divergence (Light Blue)**
- **Price**: Lower highs
- **RSI**: Higher highs
- **Signal**: Downtrend continuation
- **Label**: "隐跌" (Hidden Down)
- **Use**: Add to existing shorts
**Divergence Parameters** (Fully Customizable):
- **Right Lookback**: Bars to right of pivot (default: 5)
- **Left Lookback**: Bars to left of pivot (default: 5)
- **Max Range**: Maximum bars between pivots (default: 60)
- **Min Range**: Minimum bars between pivots (default: 5)
### Configuration Settings
#### KSI Display Settings
- **Show RSI**: Toggle RSI indicator
- **Show CCI**: Toggle both CCI lines
- **Show Williams %R**: Toggle Williams %R (optional)
#### RSI Settings
- **RSI Length**: Period for calculation (default: 22)
- **Data Source**: Price source (default: close)
- **Show Background**: Toggle green/red background
- **Show Cross Labels**: Toggle 50-level crossover labels
#### RSI Divergence Settings
- **Right Lookback**: Pivot detection right side
- **Left Lookback**: Pivot detection left side
- **Max Range**: Maximum lookback distance
- **Min Range**: Minimum lookback distance
- **Show Regular Divergence**: Enable regular divergence lines
- **Show Regular Labels**: Enable regular divergence labels
- **Show Hidden Divergence**: Enable hidden divergence lines
- **Show Hidden Labels**: Enable hidden divergence labels
#### CCI Settings
- **CCI Length**: Short-term period (default: 33)
- **CCI Mid Length**: Medium-term period (default: 77)
- **Data Source**: Price calculation (default: HLC3)
- **Show CCI(33)**: Toggle short-term CCI
- **Show CCI(77)**: Toggle medium-term CCI
#### Williams %R Settings
- **Length**: Calculation period (default: 28)
- **Data Source**: Price source (default: close)
### How to Use
#### For Basic Momentum Trading
1. **Enable RSI Only** (primary indicator)
- Focus on 50-level crossovers
- Enable crossover labels for signals
2. **Identify Momentum Direction**
- RSI > 50 = Bullish momentum
- RSI < 50 = Bearish momentum
- Background color confirms direction
3. **Look for Extremes**
- RSI > 80 = Overbought (consider selling)
- RSI < 20 = Oversold (consider buying)
4. **Trade Setup**
- Enter long when RSI crosses above 50 from oversold
- Enter short when RSI crosses below 50 from overbought
#### For Divergence Trading
1. **Enable RSI with Divergence Detection**
- Turn on regular divergence
- Optionally add hidden divergence
2. **Wait for Divergence Signal**
- Yellow label = Bullish divergence
- Blue label = Bearish divergence
3. **Confirm with Price Structure**
- Wait for support/resistance break
- Look for candlestick patterns
- Check volume confirmation
4. **Enter Position**
- Enter after confirmation
- Stop beyond divergence pivot
- Target next key level
#### For Multi-Oscillator Confirmation
1. **Enable All Three Indicators**
- RSI (momentum)
- CCI dual (cycle analysis)
- Williams %R (extremes)
2. **Look for Alignment**
- All above 50 = Strong bullish
- All below 50 = Strong bearish
- Mixed signals = Consolidation
3. **Identify Extremes**
- All indicators > 80 = Extreme overbought
- All indicators < 20 = Extreme oversold
4. **Trade Reversals**
- Enter counter-trend when all aligned at extremes
- Confirm with divergence if available
- Use tight stops
#### For CCI Dual-Period Analysis
1. **Enable Both CCI Lines**
- CCI(33) = Short-term
- CCI(77) = Medium-term
2. **Watch for Crossovers**
- Green crosses above orange = Bullish acceleration
- Green crosses below orange = Bearish acceleration
3. **Analyze Divergence Between Periods**
- Short-term rising, medium falling = Potential reversal
- Both rising together = Strong trend
4. **Trade Accordingly**
- Follow crossover direction
- Exit when lines converge
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: RSI 50-Level Crossover
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with background and labels
- Wait for clear trend
- Look for retracement to 50 level
**Entry:**
- Long: "突破" label appears after pullback
- Short: "跌破" label appears after bounce
**Stop Loss:**
- Long: Below recent swing low
- Short: Above recent swing high
**Exit:**
- Opposite crossover label
- Or predetermined target (2:1 risk-reward)
**Best For:** Trend following, clear markets
#### Strategy 2: RSI Divergence Reversal
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with regular divergence
- Wait for extreme levels (>70 or <30)
- Look for divergence signal
**Entry:**
- Long: Yellow "涨" label at oversold level
- Short: Blue "跌" label at overbought level
**Confirmation:**
- Wait for price to break structure
- Check for volume increase
- Look for candlestick reversal pattern
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond divergence pivot point
**Exit:**
- Take partial profit at 50 level
- Exit remainder at opposite extreme or divergence
**Best For:** Swing trading, range-bound markets
#### Strategy 3: Triple Oscillator Confluence
**Setup:**
- Enable all three indicators
- Wait for all to reach extreme (>80 or <20)
- Look for alignment
**Entry:**
- Long: All three below 20, first one crosses above 20
- Short: All three above 80, first one crosses below 80
**Confirmation:**
- All indicators must align
- Price at support/resistance
- Volume spike helps
**Stop Loss:**
- Fixed percentage or ATR-based
**Exit:**
- When any indicator crosses 50 level
- Or at predetermined target
**Best For:** High-probability reversals, volatile markets
#### Strategy 4: CCI Dual-Period System
**Setup:**
- Enable both CCI lines only
- Disable RSI and Williams %R for clarity
- Watch for crossovers
**Entry:**
- Long: CCI(33) crosses above CCI(77) below 50 line
- Short: CCI(33) crosses below CCI(77) above 50 line
**Confirmation:**
- Both should be moving in entry direction
- Price breaking key level helps
**Stop Loss:**
- When CCIs cross back in opposite direction
**Exit:**
- Both CCIs enter opposite extreme zone
- Or trailing stop
**Best For:** Catching trend continuations, momentum trading
#### Strategy 5: Hidden Divergence Continuation
**Setup:**
- Enable RSI with hidden divergence
- Confirm existing trend
- Wait for pullback
**Entry:**
- Uptrend: "隐涨" label during pullback
- Downtrend: "隐跌" label during bounce
**Confirmation:**
- Price holds key moving average
- Trend structure intact
**Stop Loss:**
- Beyond pullback extreme
**Exit:**
- Regular divergence appears (reversal warning)
- Or trend structure breaks
**Best For:** Adding to positions, trend trading
### Best Practices
#### Choosing Which Indicators to Display
**For Beginners:**
- Use RSI only
- Enable background color and labels
- Focus on 50-level crossovers
- Simple and effective
**For Intermediate Traders:**
- RSI + Regular Divergence
- Add CCI for confirmation
- Use dual perspectives
- Better accuracy
**For Advanced Traders:**
- All three indicators
- Full divergence detection
- Multi-timeframe analysis
- Maximum information
#### Oscillator Priority
**Primary**: RSI (22)
- Most reliable
- Best divergence detection
- Good for all timeframes
- Use this as your main decision maker
**Secondary**: CCI (33/77)
- Adds cycle analysis
- Great for confirmation
- Dual-period crossovers valuable
- Use to confirm RSI signals
**Tertiary**: Williams %R (28)
- Extreme readings useful
- More volatile
- Best for short-term
- Use sparingly for extra confirmation
#### Timeframe Considerations
**Lower Timeframes (1m-15m):**
- More signals, less reliable
- Use tight divergence parameters
- Focus on RSI crossovers
- Quick entries and exits
**Medium Timeframes (30m-4H):**
- Balanced signal frequency
- Default settings work well
- Best for divergence trading
- Swing trading optimal
**Higher Timeframes (Daily+):**
- Fewer but stronger signals
- Widen divergence ranges
- All indicators more reliable
- Position trading best
#### Divergence Trading Tips
1. **Wait for Confirmation**
- Divergence alone isn't enough
- Need price structure break
- Volume helps validate
2. **Best at Extremes**
- Divergences near 80/20 levels most reliable
- Mid-level divergences often fail
- Combine with support/resistance
3. **Multiple Divergences**
- Second divergence stronger than first
- Third divergence extremely powerful
- Watch for "triple divergence"
4. **Timeframe Alignment**
- Check higher timeframe for direction
- Trade divergences in direction of larger trend
- Counter-trend divergences riskier
### Indicator Combinations
**With Moving Averages:**
- Use EMAs (21/55/144) for trend
- KSI for entry timing
- Enter when both align
**With Volume:**
- Volume confirms breakouts
- Divergence + volume divergence = Stronger
- Low volume at extremes = Reversal likely
**With Support/Resistance:**
- Price levels for targets
- KSI for entry timing
- Divergences at levels = Highest probability
**With Bias Indicator:**
- Bias shows price deviation
- KSI shows momentum
- Both diverging = Strong reversal signal
**With OBV Indicator:**
- OBV shows volume trend
- KSI shows price momentum
- Volume/momentum divergence powerful
### Common Patterns
1. **Bullish Reversal**: All oscillators oversold + RSI bullish divergence
2. **Bearish Reversal**: All oscillators overbought + RSI bearish divergence
3. **Trend Acceleration**: RSI > 50, both CCIs rising, Williams %R not extreme
4. **Weakening Trend**: RSI declining while price rising (pre-divergence warning)
5. **Strong Trend**: All oscillators stay above/below 50 for extended period
6. **Consolidation**: Oscillators crossing 50 frequently without extremes
7. **Exhaustion**: Multiple oscillators at extreme + hidden divergence failure
### Performance Tips
- Start simple: RSI only
- Add indicators gradually as you learn
- Disable unused features for cleaner charts
- Use labels strategically (not always on)
- Test different RSI lengths for your market
- Adjust divergence parameters based on volatility
### Alert Conditions
The indicator includes alerts for:
- RSI crossing above 50
- RSI crossing below 50
- RSI regular bullish divergence
- RSI regular bearish divergence
- RSI hidden bullish divergence
- RSI hidden bearish divergence
---
## 中文说明文档
### 概述
Scout Regiment - KSI（关键随机指标）是一个综合性动量振荡器，将三个强大的技术指标 - RSI、CCI和威廉指标 - 组合到一个统一的显示中。这种多指标方法为交易者提供了市场动量、超买超卖状况和通过高级背离检测发现潜在反转点的多元视角。
### 什么是KSI？
KSI代表"关键随机指标" - 一个综合动量指标：
- 显示多个振荡器，标准化到0-100刻度
- 使用标准化波段（20/50/80）便于一致解读
- 结合RSI用于趋势、CCI用于周期、威廉指标用于反转检测
- 专门为RSI提供增强的背离检测
### 核心功能
#### 1. **三重振荡器系统**
**① RSI（相对强弱指数）** - 主要指标
- **用途**：测量动量并识别超买超卖状况
- **默认长度**：22周期
- **显示**：蓝色线（2像素）
- **关键水平**：
- 50以上：看涨动量
- 50以下：看跌动量
- 80以上：超买
- 20以下：超卖
- **特殊功能**：
- 背景颜色指示（绿色/红色）
- 50水平穿越标签
- 完整背离检测（4种类型）
**② CCI（顺势指标）** - 双周期
- **用途**：识别周期性趋势和极端状况
- **双重显示**：
- CCI(33)：短期周期 - 绿色线（1像素）
- CCI(77)：中期周期 - 橙色线（1像素）
- **默认数据源**：HLC3（典型价格）
- **标准化刻度**：从±100映射到0-100以保持一致性
- **解读**：
- 80以上：强劲上升动量
- 20以下：强劲下降动量
- 50水平：中性
- 周期间背离：趋势变化警告
**③ 威廉指标 %R** - 可选
- **用途**：识别超买超卖极值
- **默认长度**：28周期
- **显示**：洋红色线（2像素）
- **刻度**：反转并标准化到0-100
- **最适合**：短期反转信号
- **默认**：禁用（需要额外确认时启用）
#### 2. **标准化波段系统**
**三层结构：**
- **上轨（80）**：超买区域
- 强动量区域
- 注意反转信号
- 此处的背离最可靠
- **中线（50）**：均衡线
- 分隔看涨/看跌区域
- 穿越表示动量转变
- 关键决策水平
- **下轨（20）**：超卖区域
- 弱动量区域
- 寻找反弹信号
- 此处的背离预示潜在反转
**波段填充**：20-80之间的深色背景，增强视觉清晰度
#### 3. **RSI视觉增强**
**背景颜色指示**
- 绿色背景：RSI在50以上（看涨偏向）
- 红色背景：RSI在50以下（看跌偏向）
- 可选显示，图表更清爽
- 帮助识别整体动量方向
**穿越标签**
- "突破"：RSI向上穿越50
- "跌破"：RSI向下穿越50
- 标记动量转变点
- 可开关
#### 4. **高级RSI背离检测**
指标仅为RSI（最可靠的振荡器）提供全面背离检测：
**常规看涨背离（黄色）**
- **价格**：更低的低点
- **RSI**：更高的低点
- **信号**：潜在向上反转
- **标签**："涨"
- **最常见**：在超卖水平附近（30以下）
**常规看跌背离（蓝色）**
- **价格**：更高的高点
- **RSI**：更低的高点
- **信号**：潜在向下反转
- **标签**："跌"
- **最常见**：在超买水平附近（70以上）
**隐藏看涨背离（浅黄色）**
- **价格**：更高的低点
- **RSI**：更低的低点
- **信号**：上升趋势延续
- **标签**："隐涨"
- **用途**：加仓现有多头
**隐藏看跌背离（浅蓝色）**
- **价格**：更低的高点
- **RSI**：更高的高点
- **信号**：下降趋势延续
- **标签**："隐跌"
- **用途**：加仓现有空头
**背离参数**（完全可自定义）：
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴点右侧K线数（默认：5）
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴点左侧K线数（默认：5）
- **最大范围**：枢轴点之间最大K线数（默认：60）
- **最小范围**：枢轴点之间最小K线数（默认：5）
### 配置设置
#### KSI显示设置
- **显示RSI**：切换RSI指标
- **显示CCI**：切换两条CCI线
- **显示威廉指标 %R**：切换威廉指标（可选）
#### RSI设置
- **RSI长度**：计算周期（默认：22）
- **数据源**：价格源（默认：收盘价）
- **显示背景**：切换绿色/红色背景
- **显示穿越标签**：切换50水平穿越标签
#### RSI背离设置
- **右侧回溯**：枢轴检测右侧
- **左侧回溯**：枢轴检测左侧
- **回溯范围最大值**：最大回溯距离
- **回溯范围最小值**：最小回溯距离
- **显示常规背离**：启用常规背离线
- **显示常规背离标签**：启用常规背离标签
- **显示隐藏背离**：启用隐藏背离线
- **显示隐藏背离标签**：启用隐藏背离标签
#### CCI设置
- **CCI长度**：短期周期（默认：33）
- **CCI中期长度**：中期周期（默认：77）
- **数据源**：价格计算（默认：HLC3）
- **显示CCI(33)**：切换短期CCI
- **显示CCI(77)**：切换中期CCI
#### 威廉指标 %R 设置
- **长度**：计算周期（默认：28）
- **数据源**：价格源（默认：收盘价）
### 使用方法
#### 基础动量交易
1. **仅启用RSI**（主要指标）
- 关注50水平穿越
- 启用穿越标签获取信号
2. **识别动量方向**
- RSI > 50 = 看涨动量
- RSI < 50 = 看跌动量
- 背景颜色确认方向
3. **寻找极值**
- RSI > 80 = 超买（考虑卖出）
- RSI < 20 = 超卖（考虑买入）
4. **交易设置**
- RSI从超卖区向上穿越50时做多
- RSI从超买区向下穿越50时做空
#### 背离交易
1. **启用RSI和背离检测**
- 打开常规背离
- 可选添加隐藏背离
2. **等待背离信号**
- 黄色标签 = 看涨背离
- 蓝色标签 = 看跌背离
3. **用价格结构确认**
- 等待支撑/阻力突破
- 寻找K线形态
- 检查成交量确认
4. **进入仓位**
- 确认后进入
- 止损设在背离枢轴点之外
- 目标下一个关键水平
#### 多振荡器确认
1. **启用全部三个指标**
- RSI（动量）
- CCI双周期（周期分析）
- 威廉指标 %R（极值）
2. **寻找一致性**
- 全部在50以上 = 强劲看涨
- 全部在50以下 = 强劲看跌
- 信号混合 = 盘整
3. **识别极值**
- 所有指标 > 80 = 极度超买
- 所有指标 < 20 = 极度超卖
4. **交易反转**
- 所有指标在极值一致时逆势进入
- 可能的话用背离确认
- 使用紧密止损
#### CCI双周期分析
1. **启用两条CCI线**
- CCI(33) = 短期
- CCI(77) = 中期
2. **观察穿越**
- 绿色线穿越橙色线向上 = 看涨加速
- 绿色线穿越橙色线向下 = 看跌加速
3. **分析周期间背离**
- 短期上升，中期下降 = 潜在反转
- 两者同时上升 = 强趋势
4. **相应交易**
- 跟随穿越方向
- 线条汇合时退出
### 交易策略
#### 策略1：RSI 50水平穿越
**设置：**
- 启用RSI及背景和标签
- 等待明确趋势
- 寻找回调至50水平
**入场：**
- 多头：回调后出现"突破"标签
- 空头：反弹后出现"跌破"标签
**止损：**
- 多头：近期波动低点之下
- 空头：近期波动高点之上
**离场：**
- 出现相反穿越标签
- 或预定目标（2:1风险收益比）
**适合：**趋势跟随、明确市场
#### 策略2：RSI背离反转
**设置：**
- 启用RSI和常规背离
- 等待极端水平（>70或<30）
- 寻找背离信号
**入场：**
- 多头：超卖水平出现黄色"涨"标签
- 空头：超买水平出现蓝色"跌"标签
**确认：**
- 等待价格突破结构
- 检查成交量增加
- 寻找K线反转形态
**止损：**
- 背离枢轴点之外
**离场：**
- 在50水平部分获利
- 其余在相反极值或背离处离场
**适合：**波段交易、震荡市场
#### 策略3：三重振荡器汇合
**设置：**
- 启用全部三个指标
- 等待全部达到极值（>80或<20）
- 寻找一致性
**入场：**
- 多头：三个全部低于20，第一个向上穿越20
- 空头：三个全部高于80，第一个向下穿越80
**确认：**
- 所有指标必须一致
- 价格在支撑/阻力位
- 成交量激增有帮助
**止损：**
- 固定百分比或基于ATR
**离场：**
- 任一指标穿越50水平时
- 或在预定目标
**适合：**高概率反转、波动市场
#### 策略4：CCI双周期系统
**设置：**
- 仅启用两条CCI线
- 禁用RSI和威廉指标以保持清晰
- 观察穿越
**入场：**
- 多头：CCI(33)在50线下方向上穿越CCI(77)
- 空头：CCI(33)在50线上方向下穿越CCI(77)
**确认：**
- 两者都应朝入场方向移动
- 价格突破关键水平有帮助
**止损：**
- CCI反向穿越时
**离场：**
- 两条CCI进入相反极值区域
- 或移动止损
**适合：**捕捉趋势延续、动量交易
#### 策略5：隐藏背离延续
**设置：**
- 启用RSI和隐藏背离
- 确认现有趋势
- 等待回调
**入场：**
- 上升趋势：回调期间出现"隐涨"标签
- 下降趋势：反弹期间出现"隐跌"标签
**确认：**
- 价格守住关键移动平均线
- 趋势结构完整
**止损：**
- 回调极值之外
**离场：**
- 出现常规背离（反转警告）
- 或趋势结构破坏
**适合：**加仓、趋势交易
### 最佳实践
#### 选择显示哪些指标
**新手：**
- 仅使用RSI
- 启用背景颜色和标签
- 关注50水平穿越
- 简单有效
**中级交易者：**
- RSI + 常规背离
- 添加CCI确认
- 使用双重视角
- 更高准确度
**高级交易者：**
- 全部三个指标
- 完整背离检测
- 多时间框架分析
- 信息最大化
#### 振荡器优先级
**主要**：RSI (22)
- 最可靠
- 最佳背离检测
- 适用所有时间框架
- 用作主要决策依据
**次要**：CCI (33/77)
- 添加周期分析
- 确认效果好
- 双周期穿越有价值
- 用于确认RSI信号
**第三**：威廉指标 %R (28)
- 极值读数有用
- 更波动
- 最适合短期
- 谨慎使用以获额外确认
#### 时间框架考虑
**低时间框架（1分钟-15分钟）：**
- 更多信号，可靠性较低
- 使用紧密背离参数
- 关注RSI穿越
- 快速进出
**中等时间框架（30分钟-4小时）：**
- 信号频率平衡
- 默认设置效果好
- 最适合背离交易
- 波段交易最优
**高时间框架（日线+）：**
- 信号较少但更强
- 扩大背离范围
- 所有指标更可靠
- 最适合仓位交易
#### 背离交易技巧
1. **等待确认**
- 仅背离不够
- 需要价格结构突破
- 成交量帮助验证
2. **极值处最佳**
- 80/20水平附近的背离最可靠
- 中间水平背离常失败
- 结合支撑/阻力
3. **多重背离**
- 第二次背离强于第一次
- 第三次背离极其强大
- 注意"三重背离"
4. **时间框架对齐**
- 检查更高时间框架方向
- 顺大趋势方向交易背离
- 逆势背离风险更大
### 指标组合
**与移动平均线配合：**
- 使用EMA（21/55/144）确定趋势
- KSI用于入场时机
- 两者一致时进入
**与成交量配合：**
- 成交量确认突破
- 背离 + 成交量背离 = 更强
- 极值处低成交量 = 可能反转
**与支撑/阻力配合：**
- 价格水平作为目标
- KSI用于入场时机
- 水平处的背离 = 最高概率
**与Bias指标配合：**
- Bias显示价格偏离
- KSI显示动量
- 两者都背离 = 强反转信号
**与OBV指标配合：**
- OBV显示成交量趋势
- KSI显示价格动量
- 成交量/动量背离强大
### 常见形态
1. **看涨反转**：所有振荡器超卖 + RSI看涨背离
2. **看跌反转**：所有振荡器超买 + RSI看跌背离
3. **趋势加速**：RSI > 50，两条CCI上升，威廉指标不极端
4. **趋势减弱**：价格上升时RSI下降（背离前警告）
5. **强趋势**：所有振荡器长时间保持在50上方/下方
6. **盘整**：振荡器频繁穿越50无极值
7. **衰竭**：多个振荡器在极值 + 隐藏背离失败
### 性能提示
- 从简单开始：仅RSI
- 学习时逐渐添加指标
- 禁用未使用功能以保持图表清晰
- 策略性使用标签（不总是开启）
- 为您的市场测试不同RSI长度
- 根据波动性调整背离参数
### 警报条件
指标包含以下警报：
- RSI向上穿越50
- RSI向下穿越50
- RSI常规看涨背离
- RSI常规看跌背离
- RSI隐藏看涨背离
- RSI隐藏看跌背离
---
## Technical Support
For questions or issues, please refer to the TradingView community or contact the indicator creator.
## 技术支持
如有问题，请参考TradingView社区或联系指标创建者。
Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light [SYNC & TRADE]Indicator Description: "Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light "
Core Philosophy: This indicator is not just a collection of random signals. It is a complete trading system built around two core concepts: Strength (Volume-based Candles) and Probability (Fibonacci Levels), synchronized between spot and futures markets to filter out noise and manipulations.
🎯 The "Strong Candle Defense" Strategy
The primary tactic is to enter in the direction of the market's dominant force at an optimal price.
1. Identifying Strength: The indicator identifies "Strong Candles" in real-time — candles with anomalously high volume and significant delta (buyer/seller dominance), confirmed across multiple timeframes. They are marked with circles (blue for bullish, red for bearish) and Z-level labels showing the statistical significance of the move.
2. "Ladder" Entry: We do not chase the market. The strategy is to wait for a pullback (retest) to the body of the strong candle or its key internal Fibonacci levels (38.2%, 50%, 61.8%) for a favorable entry. The position is built in parts ("scaling in") as the bounce is confirmed.
3. Profit-Taking Targets: The main take-profit targets are set at the external Fibonacci extension levels:
First Target: 161.8% — The classic level to secure the first portion of profits.
Second Target: 261.8% (or 227% in Light mode) — The level for capturing extended moves, where the remaining position is exited.
Refined Stop-Loss Rules and Strategy Invalidation Conditions:
Primary Stop-Loss: Placed beyond the extreme of the strong candle (the Fibonacci grid's 0% level). For a long position — below the strong candle's low; for a short position — above its high.
Strategy Invalidation Criterion: The strategy is considered invalidated, and the position should be exited, if the price closes a candle's body beyond the key protective level. This specifically means:
For a Long: A candle closes (the close price) below the low of the strong candle.
For a Short: A candle closes (the close price) above the high of the strong candle.
This criterion, especially on lower timeframes, provides a stricter and more timely signal of a setup failure than a mere wick break.
Alternative Supertrend Stop-Loss: The proprietary Supertrend line can be used as a dynamic trailing stop. The stop-loss is placed behind the Supertrend line, and a candle close beyond this line also signals a trend violation and the need to exit the position.
📊 Unique Automated Fibonacci Grids
Our Fibonacci grids are not the standard, static drawing tool. They are a dynamic profit-taking and management system.
Automatic Plotting: A new grid is automatically drawn on every new strong candle, freeing the trader from manual work.
Smart Management:
Self-Cleaning: When enabled, the grid automatically removes itself after the price has fully "filled" its range (reached the 0% level), preventing chart clutter.
Dynamic Levels: Depending on the selected type (Fibonacci Light, Standard, Extended, Geometric), a different set of internal and external levels is plotted, adapting the tool to various trading styles from scalping to position trading.
Key Difference from Standard Tools: Unlike the basic Fibonacci tool, our grids are an integral part of the trading logic. They are tied to strong candles (high-probability points), update automatically, and act as an execution system for the strategy, not just an analysis tool.
📈 Proprietary Supertrend with Advanced Filtering
We do not use the standard, off-the-shelf Supertrend. Our version is a hybrid algorithm, supercharged with volume analysis.
Dynamic ATR Multiplier: The indicator's multiplier adapts to market conditions. During high volume delta (strong buying/selling pressure), the multiplier increases, making the trend line less sensitive and helping you stay in the trade during strong impulses.
Strong Candle Filter: Supertrend signal changes can be optionally restricted to confirm only on strong candles. This drastically reduces false entries. The trend doesn't change just based on volatility (ATR), but upon confirmation by real strength (volume).
Profit Potential: Combining signals from this filtered Supertrend with the "Strong Candle Defense" strategy allows for precise entry timing in the direction of the major trend, with clear and statistically sound profit targets.
⚙️ Additional Systems for Enhanced Accuracy
Spot & Futures Sync: The indicator compares strength between spot and futures markets. A divergence (e.g., a strong long candle on spot but weakness on futures) is marked as a potential "Manipulation" (X), warning you of an unreliable signal.
Multi-Timeframe Volume Analysis: Delta and volume are analyzed from lower timeframes, providing a more granular picture within a single candle of your current TF.
Supertrend Table: A quick overview of the trend direction across all major timeframes (from 5m to 1W) in a single table.
Conclusion:
The "Strong Candle and Probability Levels Light" indicator is a professional suite for traders who want to trade not just signals, but probabilities. The strategy, built around defending strong candles, combined with unique automated Fibonacci grids and an adaptive Supertrend, provides a clear plan from entry to exit. The use of market synchronization and multi-timeframe volume analysis minimizes noise and false signals, allowing you to focus on high-quality setups.
Hellenic EMA Matrix - PremiumHellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium
Complete User Guide
Table of Contents
Introduction
Indicator Philosophy
Mathematical Constants
EMA Types
Settings
Trading Signals
Visualization
Usage Strategies
FAQ
Introduction
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a premium indicator based on mathematical constants of nature: Phi (Phi - Golden Ratio), Pi (Pi), e (Euler's number). The indicator uses these universal constants to create dynamic EMAs that adapt to the natural rhythms of the market.
Key Features:
6 EMA types based on mathematical constants
Premium visualization with Neon Glow and Gradient Clouds
Automatic Fast/Mid/Slow EMA sorting
STRONG signals for powerful trends
Pulsing Ribbon Bar for instant trend assessment
Works on all timeframes (M1 - MN)
Indicator Philosophy
Why Mathematical Constants?
Traditional EMAs use arbitrary periods (9, 21, 50, 200). Hellenic Matrix goes further, using universal mathematical constants found in nature:
Phi (1.618) - Golden Ratio: galaxy spirals, seashells, human body proportions
Pi (3.14159) - Pi: circles, waves, cycles
e (2.71828) - Natural logarithm base: exponential growth, radioactive decay
Markets are also a natural system composed of millions of participants. Using mathematical constants allows tuning into the natural rhythms of market cycles.
Mathematical Constants
Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio
Phi = 1.618033988749895
Properties:
Phi² = Phi + 1 = 2.618
Phi³ = 4.236
Phi⁴ = 6.854
Application: Ideal for trending movements and Fibonacci corrections
Pi (Pi) - Pi Number
Pi = 3.141592653589793
Properties:
2Pi = 6.283 (full circle)
3Pi = 9.425
4Pi = 12.566
Application: Excellent for cyclical markets and wave structures
e (Euler) - Euler's Number
e = 2.718281828459045
Properties:
e² = 7.389
e³ = 20.085
e⁴ = 54.598
Application: Suitable for exponential movements and volatile markets
EMA Types
1. Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio EMA
Description: EMA based on the golden ratio
Period Formula:
Period = Phi^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Phi Power Level (1-8): Power of Phi
Phi¹ = 1.618 → ~16 period (with Base=10)
Phi² = 2.618 → ~26 period
Phi³ = 4.236 → ~42 period (recommended)
Phi⁴ = 6.854 → ~69 period
Recommendations:
Phi² or Phi³ for day trading
Phi⁴ or Phi⁵ for swing trading
Works excellently as Fast EMA
2. Pi (Pi) - Circular EMA
Description: EMA based on Pi for cyclical movements
Period Formula:
Period = Pi × Multiple × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Pi Multiple (1-10): Pi multiplier
1Pi = 3.14 → ~31 period (with Base=10)
2Pi = 6.28 → ~63 period (recommended)
3Pi = 9.42 → ~94 period
Recommendations:
2Pi ideal as Mid or Slow EMA
Excellently identifies cycles and waves
Use on volatile markets (crypto, forex)
3. e (Euler) - Natural EMA
Description: EMA based on natural logarithm
Period Formula:
Period = e^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
e Power Level (1-6): Power of e
e¹ = 2.718 → ~27 period (with Base=10)
e² = 7.389 → ~74 period (recommended)
e³ = 20.085 → ~201 period
Recommendations:
e² works excellently as Slow EMA
Ideal for stocks and indices
Filters noise well on lower timeframes
4. Delta (Delta) - Adaptive EMA
Description: Adaptive EMA that changes period based on volatility
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + (Volatility - 1) × Factor)
Parameters:
Delta Base Period (5-200): Base period (default 20)
Delta Volatility Sensitivity (0.5-5.0): Volatility sensitivity (default 2.0)
How it works:
During low volatility → period decreases → EMA reacts faster
During high volatility → period increases → EMA smooths noise
Recommendations:
Works excellently on news and sharp movements
Use as Fast EMA for quick adaptation
Sensitivity 2.0-3.0 for crypto, 1.0-2.0 for stocks
5. Sigma (Sigma) - Composite EMA
Description: Composite EMA combining multiple active EMAs
Composition Methods:
Weighted Average (default):
Sigma = (Phi + Pi + e + Delta) / 4
Simple average of all active EMAs
Geometric Mean:
Sigma = fourth_root(Phi × Pi × e × Delta)
Geometric mean (more conservative)
Harmonic Mean:
Sigma = 4 / (1/Phi + 1/Pi + 1/e + 1/Delta)
Harmonic mean (more weight to smaller values)
Recommendations:
Enable for additional confirmation
Use as Mid EMA
Weighted Average - most universal method
6. Lambda (Lambda) - Wave EMA
Description: Wave EMA with sinusoidal period modulation
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + Amplitude × sin(2Pi × bar / Frequency))
Parameters:
Lambda Base Period (10-200): Base period
Lambda Wave Amplitude (0.1-2.0): Wave amplitude
Lambda Wave Frequency (10-200): Wave frequency in bars
How it works:
Period pulsates sinusoidally
Creates wave effect following market cycles
Recommendations:
Experimental EMA for advanced users
Works well on cyclical markets
Frequency = 50 for day trading, 100+ for swing
Settings
Matrix Core Settings
Base Multiplier (1-100)
Multiplies all EMA periods
Base = 1: Very fast EMAs (Phi³ = 4, 2Pi = 6, e² = 7)
Base = 10: Standard (Phi³ = 42, 2Pi = 63, e² = 74)
Base = 20: Slow EMAs (Phi³ = 85, 2Pi = 126, e² = 148)
Recommendations by timeframe:
M1-M5: Base = 5-10
M15-H1: Base = 10-15 (recommended)
H4-D1: Base = 15-25
W1-MN: Base = 25-50
Matrix Source
Data source selection for EMA calculation:
close - closing price (standard)
open - opening price
high - high
low - low
hl2 - (high + low) / 2
hlc3 - (high + low + close) / 3
ohlc4 - (open + high + low + close) / 4
When to change:
hlc3 or ohlc4 for smoother signals
high for aggressive longs
low for aggressive shorts
Manual EMA Selection
Critically important setting! Determines which EMAs are used for signal generation.
Use Manual Fast/Slow/Mid Selection
Enabled (default): You select EMAs manually
Disabled: Automatic selection by periods
Fast EMA
Fast EMA - reacts first to price changes
Recommendations:
Phi Golden (recommended) - universal choice
Delta Adaptive - for volatile markets
Must be fastest (smallest period)
Slow EMA
Slow EMA - determines main trend
Recommendations:
Pi Circular (recommended) - excellent trend filter
e Natural - for smoother trend
Must be slowest (largest period)
Mid EMA
Mid EMA - additional signal filter
Recommendations:
e Natural (recommended) - excellent middle level
Pi Circular - alternative
None - for more frequent signals (only 2 EMAs)
IMPORTANT: The indicator automatically sorts selected EMAs by their actual periods:
Fast = EMA with smallest period
Mid = EMA with middle period
Slow = EMA with largest period
Therefore, you can select any combination - the indicator will arrange them correctly!
Premium Visualization
Neon Glow
Enable Neon Glow for EMAs - adds glowing effect around EMA lines
Glow Strength:
Light - subtle glow
Medium (recommended) - optimal balance
Strong - bright glow (may be too bright)
Effect: 2 glow layers around each EMA for 3D effect
Gradient Clouds
Enable Gradient Clouds - fills space between EMAs with gradient
Parameters:
Cloud Transparency (85-98): Cloud transparency
95-97 (recommended)
Higher = more transparent
Dynamic Cloud Intensity - automatically changes transparency based on EMA distance
Cloud Colors:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - when Pi above Phi (bullish)
Gold - when Phi above Pi (bearish)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - when e above Pi (bullish)
Blue - when Pi above e (bearish)
2 layers for volumetric effect
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Enable Pulsing Indicator Bar - pulsing strip at bottom/top of chart
Parameters:
Ribbon Position: Top / Bottom (recommended)
Pulse Speed: Slow / Medium (recommended) / Fast
Symbols and colors:
Green filled square - STRONG BULLISH
Pink filled square - STRONG BEARISH
Blue hollow square - Bullish (regular)
Red hollow square - Bearish (regular)
Purple rectangle - Neutral
Effect: Pulsation with sinusoid for living market feel
Signal Bar Highlights
Enable Signal Bar Highlights - highlights bars with signals
Parameters:
Highlight Transparency (88-96): Highlight transparency
Highlight Style:
Light Fill (recommended) - bar background fill
Thin Line - bar outline only
Highlights:
Golden Cross - green
Death Cross - pink
STRONG BUY - green
STRONG SELL - pink
Show Greek Labels
Shows Greek alphabet letters on last bar:
Phi - Phi EMA (gold)
Pi - Pi EMA (blue)
e - Euler EMA (green)
Delta - Delta EMA (purple)
Sigma - Sigma EMA (pink)
When to use: For education or presentations
Show Old Background
Old background style (not recommended):
Green background - STRONG BULLISH
Pink background - STRONG BEARISH
Blue background - Bullish
Red background - Bearish
Not recommended - use new Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Info Table
Show Info Table - table with indicator information
Parameters:
Position: Top Left / Top Right (recommended) / Bottom Left / Bottom Right
Size: Tiny / Small (recommended) / Normal / Large
Table contents:
EMA list - periods and current values of all active EMAs
Effects - active visual effects
TREND - current trend state:
STRONG UP - strong bullish
STRONG DOWN - strong bearish
Bullish - regular bullish
Bearish - regular bearish
Neutral - neutral
Momentum % - percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Setup - current Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Trading Signals
Show Golden/Death Cross
Golden Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below (bullish signal) Death Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above (bearish signal)
Symbols:
Yellow dot "GC" below - Golden Cross
Dark red dot "DC" above - Death Cross
Show STRONG Signals
STRONG BUY and STRONG SELL - the most powerful indicator signals
Conditions for STRONG BULLISH:
EMA Alignment: Fast > Mid > Slow (all EMAs aligned)
Trend: Fast > Slow (clear uptrend)
Distance: EMAs separated by minimum 0.15%
Price Position: Price above Fast EMA
Fast Slope: Fast EMA rising
Slow Slope: Slow EMA rising
Mid Trending: Mid EMA also rising (if enabled)
Conditions for STRONG BEARISH:
Same but in reverse
Visual display:
Green label "STRONG BUY" below bar
Pink label "STRONG SELL" above bar
Difference from Golden/Death Cross:
Golden/Death Cross = crossing moment (1 bar)
STRONG signal = sustained trend (lasts several bars)
IMPORTANT: After fixes, STRONG signals now:
Work on all timeframes (M1 to MN)
Don't break on small retracements
Work with any Fast/Mid/Slow combination
Automatically adapt thanks to EMA sorting
Show Stop Loss/Take Profit
Automatic SL/TP level calculation on STRONG signal
Parameters:
Stop Loss (ATR) (0.5-5.0): ATR multiplier for stop loss
1.5 (recommended) - standard
1.0 - tight stop
2.0-3.0 - wide stop
Take Profit R:R (1.0-5.0): Risk/reward ratio
2.0 (recommended) - standard (risk 1.5 ATR, profit 3.0 ATR)
1.5 - conservative
3.0-5.0 - aggressive
Formulas:
LONG:
Stop Loss = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
SHORT:
Stop Loss = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
Visualization:
Red X - Stop Loss
Green X - Take Profit
Levels remain active while STRONG signal persists
Trading Signals
Signal Types
1. Golden Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
Signal: Beginning of bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Golden Cross
STOP: Below local low or below Slow EMA
TARGET: Next resistance level or 2:1 R:R
Strengths:
Simple and clear
Works well on trending markets
Clear entry point
Weaknesses:
Lags (signal after movement starts)
Many false signals in ranging markets
May be late on fast moves
Optimal timeframes: H1, H4, D1
2. Death Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
Signal: Beginning of bearish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Death Cross
STOP: Above local high or above Slow EMA
TARGET: Next support level or 2:1 R:R
Application: Mirror of Golden Cross
3. STRONG BUY
Description: All EMAs aligned + trend + all EMAs rising
Signal: Powerful bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with STRONG BUY or on pullback to Fast EMA
STOP: Below Fast EMA or automatic SL (if enabled)
TARGET: Automatic TP (if enabled) or by levels
TRAILING: Follow Fast EMA
Entry strategies:
Aggressive: Enter immediately on signal
Conservative: Wait for pullback to Fast EMA, then enter on bounce
Pyramiding: Add positions on pullbacks to Mid EMA
Position management:
Hold while STRONG signal active
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross appearance
Move stop behind Fast EMA
Strengths:
Most reliable indicator signal
Doesn't break on pullbacks
Catches large moves
Works on all timeframes
Weaknesses:
Appears less frequently than other signals
Requires confirmation (multiple conditions)
Optimal timeframes: All (M5 - D1)
4. STRONG SELL
Description: All EMAs aligned down + downtrend + all EMAs falling
Signal: Powerful bearish trend
How to trade: Mirror of STRONG BUY
Visual Signals
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Quick market assessment at a glance:
Symbol Color State
Filled square Green STRONG BULLISH
Filled square Pink STRONG BEARISH
Hollow square Blue Bullish
Hollow square Red Bearish
Rectangle Purple Neutral
Pulsation: Sinusoidal, creates living effect
Signal Bar Highlights
Bars with signals are highlighted:
Green highlight: STRONG BUY or Golden Cross
Pink highlight: STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Gradient Clouds
Colored space between EMAs shows trend strength:
Wide clouds - strong trend
Narrow clouds - weak trend or consolidation
Color change - trend change
Info Table
Quick reference in corner:
TREND: Current state (STRONG UP, Bullish, Neutral, Bearish, STRONG DOWN)
Momentum %: Movement strength
Effects: Active visual effects
Setup: Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Usage Strategies
Strategy 1: "Golden Trailing"
Idea: Follow STRONG signals using Fast EMA as trailing stop
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
Wait for STRONG BUY
Enter on bar close or on pullback to Fast EMA
Stop below Fast EMA
Management:
Hold position while STRONG signal active
Move stop behind Fast EMA daily
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Take Profit:
Partially close at +2R
Trail remainder until exit signal
For whom: Swing traders, trend followers
Pros:
Catches large moves
Simple rules
Emotionally comfortable
Cons:
Requires patience
Possible extended drawdowns on pullbacks
Strategy 2: "Scalping Bounces"
Idea: Scalp bounces from Fast EMA during STRONG trend
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sensitivity 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 5
Timeframe: M5, M15
Entry rules:
STRONG signal must be active
Wait for price pullback to Fast EMA
Enter on bounce (candle closes above/below Fast EMA)
Stop behind local extreme (15-20 pips)
Take Profit:
+1.5R or to Mid EMA
Or to next level
For whom: Active day traders
Pros:
Many signals
Clear entry point
Quick profits
Cons:
Requires constant monitoring
Not all bounces work
Requires discipline for frequent trading
Strategy 3: "Triple Filter"
Idea: Enter only when all 3 EMAs and price perfectly aligned
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Entry rules (LONG):
STRONG BUY active
Price above all three EMAs
Fast > Mid > Slow (all aligned)
All EMAs rising (slope up)
Gradient Clouds wide and bright
Entry:
On bar close meeting all conditions
Or on next pullback to Fast EMA
Stop:
Below Mid EMA or -1.5 ATR
Take Profit:
First target: +3R
Second target: next major level
Trailing: Mid EMA
For whom: Conservative swing traders, investors
Pros:
Very reliable signals
Minimum false entries
Large profit potential
Cons:
Rare signals (2-5 per month)
Requires patience
Strategy 4: "Adaptive Scalper"
Idea: Use only Delta Adaptive EMA for quick volatility reaction
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None
Slow: Delta Adaptive (Base 30, Sensitivity 2.0)
Base Multiplier: 3
Timeframe: M1, M5
Feature: Two different Delta EMAs with different settings
Entry rules:
Golden Cross between two Delta EMAs
Both Delta EMAs must be rising/falling
Enter on next bar
Stop:
10-15 pips or below Slow Delta EMA
Take Profit:
+1R to +2R
Or Death Cross
For whom: Scalpers on cryptocurrencies and forex
Pros:
Instant volatility adaptation
Many signals on volatile markets
Quick results
Cons:
Much noise on calm markets
Requires fast execution
High commissions may eat profits
Strategy 5: "Cyclical Trader"
Idea: Use Pi and Lambda for trading cyclical markets
Settings:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Lambda Wave (Base 30, Amplitude 0.5, Frequency 50)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
STRONG signal active
Lambda Wave EMA synchronized with trend
Enter on bounce from Lambda Wave
For whom: Traders of cyclical assets (some altcoins, commodities)
Pros:
Catches cyclical movements
Lambda Wave provides additional entry points
Cons:
More complex to configure
Not for all markets
Lambda Wave may give false signals
Strategy 6: "Multi-Timeframe Confirmation"
Idea: Use multiple timeframes for confirmation
Scheme:
Higher TF (D1): Determine trend direction (STRONG signal)
Middle TF (H4): Wait for STRONG signal in same direction
Lower TF (M15): Look for entry point (Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA)
Settings for all TFs:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Rules:
All 3 TFs must show one trend
Entry on lower TF
Stop by lower TF
Target by higher TF
For whom: Serious traders and investors
Pros:
Maximum reliability
Large profit targets
Minimum false signals
Cons:
Rare setups
Requires analysis of multiple charts
Experience needed
Practical Tips
DOs
Use STRONG signals as primary - they're most reliable
Let signals develop - don't exit on first pullback
Use trailing stop - follow Fast EMA
Combine with levels - S/R, Fibonacci, volumes
Test on demo before real
Adjust Base Multiplier for your timeframe
Enable visual effects - they help see the picture
Use Info Table - quick situation assessment
Watch Pulsing Bar - instant state indicator
Trust auto-sorting of Fast/Mid/Slow
DON'Ts
Don't trade against STRONG signal - trend is your friend
Don't ignore Mid EMA - it adds reliability
Don't use too small Base Multiplier on higher TFs
Don't enter on Golden Cross in range - check for trend
Don't change settings during open position
Don't forget risk management - 1-2% per trade
Don't trade all signals in row - choose best ones
Don't use indicator in isolation - combine with Price Action
Don't set too tight stops - let trade breathe
Don't over-optimize - simplicity = reliability
Optimal Settings by Asset
US Stocks (SPY, AAPL, TSLA)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 10-15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Use on daily for swing
STRONG signals very reliable
Works well on trending stocks
Forex (EUR/USD, GBP/USD)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sens 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 8-12
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Features:
Delta Adaptive works excellently on news
Many signals on M15-H1
Consider spreads
Cryptocurrencies (BTC, ETH, altcoins)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sens 3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M5, M15, H1
Features:
High volatility - adaptation needed
STRONG signals can last days
Be careful with scalping on M1-M5
Commodities (Gold, Oil)
Recommendation:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base: 12-18
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Pi works excellently on cyclical commodities
Gold responds especially well to Phi
Oil volatile - use wide stops
Indices (S&P500, Nasdaq, DAX)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 15-20
Timeframe: H4, D1, W1
Features:
Very trending instruments
STRONG signals last weeks
Good for position trading
Alerts
The indicator supports 6 alert types:
1. Golden Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: GOLDEN CROSS - Fast EMA crossed above Slow EMA - Bullish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
2. Death Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: DEATH CROSS - Fast EMA crossed below Slow EMA - Bearish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
3. STRONG BULLISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BULLISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful uptrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG BUY met (first bar)
4. STRONG BEARISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BEARISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful downtrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG SELL met (first bar)
5. Bullish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BULLISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for uptrend"
When: EMAs aligned bullish + price above Fast EMA (less strict condition)
6. Bearish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BEARISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for downtrend"
When: EMAs aligned bearish + price below Fast EMA (less strict condition)
How to Set Up Alerts:
Open indicator on chart
Click on three dots next to indicator name
Select "Create Alert"
In "Condition" field select needed alert:
Golden Cross
Death Cross
STRONG BULLISH
STRONG BEARISH
Bullish Ribbon
Bearish Ribbon
Configure notification method:
Pop-up in browser
Email
SMS (in Premium accounts)
Push notifications in mobile app
Webhook (for automation)
Select frequency:
Once Per Bar Close (recommended) - once on bar close
Once Per Bar - during bar formation
Only Once - only first time
Click "Create"
Tip: Create separate alerts for different timeframes and instruments
FAQ
1. Why don't STRONG signals appear?
Possible reasons:
Incorrect Fast/Mid/Slow order
Solution: Indicator automatically sorts EMAs by periods, but ensure selected EMAs have different periods
Base Multiplier too large
Solution: Reduce Base to 5-10 on lower timeframes
Market in range
Solution: STRONG signals appear only in trends - this is normal
Too strict EMA settings
Solution: Try classic combination: Phi³ / Pi×2 / e² with Base=10
Mid EMA too close to Fast or Slow
Solution: Select Mid EMA with period between Fast and Slow
2. How often should STRONG signals appear?
Normal frequency:
M1-M5: 5-15 signals per day (very active markets)
M15-H1: 2-8 signals per day
H4: 3-10 signals per week
D1: 2-5 signals per month
W1: 2-6 signals per year
If too many signals - market very volatile or Base too small
If too few signals - market in range or Base too large
4. What are the best settings for beginners?
Universal "out of the box" settings:
Matrix Core:
Base Multiplier: 10
Source: close
Phi Golden: Enabled, Power = 3
Pi Circular: Enabled, Multiple = 2
e Natural: Enabled, Power = 2
Delta Adaptive: Enabled, Base = 20, Sensitivity = 2.0
Manual Selection:
Fast: Phi Golden
Mid: e Natural
Slow: Pi Circular
Visualization:
Gradient Clouds: ON
Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
Pulsing Bar: ON (Medium)
Signal Highlights: ON (Light Fill)
Table: ON (Top Right, Small)
Signals:
Golden/Death Cross: ON
STRONG Signals: ON
Stop Loss: OFF (while learning)
Timeframe for learning: H1 or H4
5. Can I use only one EMA?
No, minimum 2 EMAs (Fast and Slow) for signal generation.
Mid EMA is optional:
With Mid EMA = more reliable but rarer signals
Without Mid EMA = more signals but less strict filtering
Recommendation: Start with 3 EMAs (Fast/Mid/Slow), then experiment
6. Does the indicator work on cryptocurrencies?
Yes, works excellently! Especially good on:
Bitcoin (BTC)
Ethereum (ETH)
Major altcoins (SOL, BNB, XRP)
Recommended settings for crypto:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10-15, Sensitivity 2.5-3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Crypto market features:
High volatility → use Delta Adaptive
24/7 trading → set alerts
Sharp movements → wide stops
7. Can I trade only with this indicator?
Technically yes, but NOT recommended.
Best approach - combine with:
Price Action - support/resistance levels, candle patterns
Volume - movement strength confirmation
Fibonacci - retracement and extension levels
RSI/MACD - divergences and overbought/oversold
Fundamental analysis - news, company reports
Hellenic Matrix:
Excellently determines trend and its strength
Provides clear entry/exit points
Doesn't consider fundamentals
Doesn't see major levels
8. Why do Gradient Clouds change color?
Color depends on EMA order:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - Pi EMA above Phi EMA (bullish alignment)
Gold - Phi EMA above Pi EMA (bearish alignment)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - e EMA above Pi EMA (bullish alignment)
Blue - Pi EMA above e EMA (bearish alignment)
Color change = EMA order change = possible trend change
9. What is Momentum % in the table?
Momentum % = percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Formula:
Momentum = ((Close - Fast EMA) / Fast EMA) × 100
Interpretation:
+0.5% to +2% - normal bullish momentum
+2% to +5% - strong bullish momentum
+5% and above - overheating (correction possible)
-0.5% to -2% - normal bearish momentum
-2% to -5% - strong bearish momentum
-5% and below - oversold (bounce possible)
Usage:
Monitor momentum during STRONG signals
Large momentum = don't enter (wait for pullback)
Small momentum = good entry point
10. How to configure for scalping?
Settings for scalping (M1-M5):
Base Multiplier: 3-5
Source: close or hlc3 (smoother)
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 8-12, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None (for more signals)
Slow: Phi Golden (Phi²) or Pi Circular (1Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON (helps see strength)
- Neon Glow: OFF (doesn't clutter chart)
- Pulsing Bar: ON (quick assessment)
- Signal Highlights: ON
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: ON (1.0-1.5 ATR, R:R 1.5-2.0)
Scalping rules:
Trade only STRONG signals
Enter on bounce from Fast EMA
Tight stops (10-20 pips)
Quick take profit (+1R to +2R)
Don't hold through news
11. How to configure for long-term investing?
Settings for investing (D1-W1):
Base Multiplier: 20-30
Source: close
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³ or Phi⁴)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi or 4Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON
- Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
- Everything else - to taste
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: OFF (use percentage stop)
Investing rules:
Enter only on STRONG signals
Hold while STRONG active (weeks/months)
Stop below Slow EMA or -10%
Take profit: by company targets or +50-100%
Ignore short-term pullbacks
12. What if indicator slows down chart?
Indicator is optimized, but if it slows:
Disable unnecessary visual effects:
Neon Glow: OFF (saves 8 plots)
Gradient Clouds: ON but low quality
Lambda Wave EMA: OFF (if not using)
Reduce number of active EMAs:
Sigma Composite: OFF
Lambda Wave: OFF
Leave only Phi, Pi, e, Delta
Simplify settings:
Pulsing Bar: OFF
Greek Labels: OFF
Info Table: smaller size
13. Can I use on different timeframes simultaneously?
Yes! Multi-timeframe analysis is very powerful:
Classic scheme:
Higher TF (D1, W1) - determine global trend
Wait for STRONG signal
This is our trading direction
Middle TF (H4, H1) - look for confirmation
STRONG signal in same direction
Precise entry zone
Lower TF (M15, M5) - entry point
Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA
Precise stop loss
Example:
W1: STRONG BUY active (global uptrend)
H4: STRONG BUY appeared (confirmation)
M15: Wait for Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA → ENTRY
Advantages:
Maximum reliability
Clear timeframe hierarchy
Large targets
14. How does indicator work on news?
Delta Adaptive EMA adapts excellently to news:
Before news:
Low volatility → Delta EMA becomes fast → pulls to price
During news:
Sharp volatility spike → Delta EMA slows → filters noise
After news:
Volatility normalizes → Delta EMA returns to normal
Recommendations:
Don't trade at news release moment (spreads widen)
Wait for STRONG signal after news (2-5 bars)
Use Delta Adaptive as Fast EMA for quick reaction
Widen stops by 50-100% during important news
Advanced Techniques
Technique 1: "Divergences with EMA"
Idea: Look for discrepancies between price and Fast EMA
Bullish divergence:
Price makes lower low
Fast EMA makes higher low
= Possible reversal up
Bearish divergence:
Price makes higher high
Fast EMA makes lower high
= Possible reversal down
How to trade:
Find divergence
Wait for STRONG signal in divergence direction
Enter on confirmation
Technique 2: "EMA Tunnel"
Idea: Use space between Fast and Slow EMA as "tunnel"
Rules:
Wide tunnel - strong trend, hold position
Narrow tunnel - weak trend or consolidation, caution
Tunnel narrowing - trend weakening, prepare to exit
Tunnel widening - trend strengthening, can add
Visually: Gradient Clouds show this automatically!
Trading:
Enter on STRONG signal (tunnel starts widening)
Hold while tunnel wide
Exit when tunnel starts narrowing
Technique 3: "Wave Analysis with Lambda"
Idea: Lambda Wave EMA creates sinusoid matching market cycles
Setup:
Lambda Base Period: 30
Lambda Wave Amplitude: 0.5
Lambda Wave Frequency: 50 (adjusted to asset cycle)
How to find correct Frequency:
Look at historical cycles (distance between local highs)
Average distance = your Frequency
Example: if highs every 40-60 bars, set Frequency = 50
Trading:
Enter when Lambda Wave at bottom of sinusoid (growth potential)
Exit when Lambda Wave at top (fall potential)
Combine with STRONG signals
Technique 4: "Cluster Analysis"
Idea: When all EMAs gather in narrow cluster = powerful breakout soon
Cluster signs:
All EMAs (Phi, Pi, e, Delta) within 0.5-1% of each other
Gradient Clouds almost invisible
Price jumping around all EMAs
Trading:
Identify cluster (all EMAs close)
Determine breakout direction (where more volume, higher TFs direction)
Wait for breakout and STRONG signal
Enter on confirmation
Target = cluster size × 3-5
This is very powerful technique for big moves!
Technique 5: "Sigma as Dynamic Level"
Idea: Sigma Composite EMA = average of all EMAs = magnetic level
Usage:
Enable Sigma Composite (Weighted Average)
Sigma works as dynamic support/resistance
Price often returns to Sigma before trend continuation
Trading:
In trend: Enter on bounces from Sigma
In range: Fade moves from Sigma (trade return to Sigma)
On breakout: Sigma becomes support/resistance
Risk Management
Basic Rules
1. Position Size
Conservative: 1% of capital per trade
Moderate: 2% of capital per trade (recommended)
Aggressive: 3-5% (only for experienced)
Calculation formula:
Lot Size = (Capital × Risk%) / (Stop in pips × Pip value)
2. Risk/Reward Ratio
Minimum: 1:1.5
Standard: 1:2 (recommended)
Optimal: 1:3
Aggressive: 1:5+
3. Maximum Drawdown
Daily: -3% to -5%
Weekly: -7% to -10%
Monthly: -15% to -20%
Upon reaching limit → STOP trading until end of period
Position Management Strategies
1. Fixed Stop
Method:
Stop below/above Fast EMA or local extreme
DON'T move stop against position
Can move to breakeven
For whom: Beginners, conservative traders
2. Trailing by Fast EMA
Method:
Each day (or bar) move stop to Fast EMA level
Position closes when price breaks Fast EMA
Advantages:
Stay in trend as long as possible
Automatically exit on reversal
For whom: Trend followers, swing traders
3. Partial Exit
Method:
50% of position close at +2R
50% hold with trailing by Mid EMA or Slow EMA
Advantages:
Lock profit
Leave position for big move
Psychologically comfortable
For whom: Universal method (recommended)
4. Pyramiding
Method:
First entry on STRONG signal (50% of planned position)
Add 25% on pullback to Fast EMA
Add another 25% on pullback to Mid EMA
Overall stop below Slow EMA
Advantages:
Average entry price
Reduce risk
Increase profit in strong trends
Caution:
Works only in trends
In range leads to losses
For whom: Experienced traders
Trading Psychology
Correct Mindset
1. Indicator is a tool, not holy grail
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
There will be losing trades - this is normal
Important is series statistics, not one trade
2. Trust the system
If STRONG signal appeared - enter
Don't search for "perfect" moment
Follow trading plan
3. Patience
STRONG signals don't appear every day
Better miss signal than enter against trend
Quality over quantity
4. Discipline
Always set stop loss
Don't move stop against position
Don't increase risk after losses
Beginner Mistakes
1. "I know better than indicator"
Indicator says STRONG BUY, but you think "too high, will wait for pullback"
Result: miss profitable move
Solution: Trust signals or don't use indicator
2. "Will reverse now for sure"
Trading against STRONG trend
Result: stops, stops, stops
Solution: Trend is your friend, trade with trend
3. "Will hold a bit more"
Don't exit when STRONG signal disappears
Greed eats profit
Solution: If signal gone - exit!
4. "I'll recover"
After losses double risk
Result: huge losses
Solution: Fixed % risk ALWAYS
5. "I don't like this signal"
Skip signals because of "feeling"
Result: inconsistency, no statistics
Solution: Trade ALL signals or clearly define filters
Trading Journal
What to Record
For each trade:
1. Entry/exit date and time
2. Instrument and timeframe
3. Signal type
Golden Cross
STRONG BUY
STRONG SELL
Death Cross
4. Indicator settings
Fast/Mid/Slow EMA
Base Multiplier
Other parameters
5. Chart screenshot
Entry moment
Exit moment
6. Trade parameters
Position size
Stop loss
Take Profit
R:R
7. Result
Profit/Loss in $
Profit/Loss in %
Profit/Loss in R
8. Notes
What was right
What was wrong
Emotions during trade
Lessons
Journal Analysis
Analyze weekly:
1. Win Rate
Win Rate = (Profitable trades / All trades) × 100%
Good: 50-60%
Excellent: 60-70%
Exceptional: 70%+
2. Average R
Average R = Sum of all R / Number of trades
Good: +0.5R
Excellent: +1.0R
Exceptional: +1.5R+
3. Profit Factor
Profit Factor = Total profit / Total losses
Good: 1.5+
Excellent: 2.0+
Exceptional: 3.0+
4. Maximum Drawdown
Track consecutive losses
If more than 5 in row - stop, check system
5. Best/Worst Trades
What was common in best trades? (do more)
What was common in worst trades? (avoid)
Pre-Trade Checklist
Technical Analysis
STRONG signal active (BUY or SELL)
All EMAs properly aligned (Fast > Mid > Slow or reverse)
Price on correct side of Fast EMA
Gradient Clouds confirm trend
Pulsing Bar shows STRONG state
Momentum % in normal range (not overheated)
No close strong levels against direction
Higher timeframe doesn't contradict
Risk Management
Position size calculated (1-2% risk)
Stop loss set
Take profit calculated (minimum 1:2)
R:R satisfactory
Daily/weekly risk limit not exceeded
No other open correlated positions
Fundamental Analysis
No important news in coming hours
Market session appropriate (liquidity)
No contradicting fundamentals
Understand why asset is moving
Psychology
Calm and thinking clearly
No emotions from previous trades
Ready to accept loss at stop
Following trading plan
Not revenging market for past losses
If at least one point is NO - think twice before entering!
Learning Roadmap
Week 1: Familiarization
Goals:
Install and configure indicator
Study all EMA types
Understand visualization
Tasks:
Add indicator to chart
Test all Fast/Mid/Slow settings
Play with Base Multiplier on different timeframes
Observe Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Study Info Table
Result: Comfort with indicator interface
Week 2: Signals
Goals:
Learn to recognize all signal types
Understand difference between Golden Cross and STRONG
Tasks:
Find 10 Golden Cross examples in history
Find 10 STRONG BUY examples in history
Compare their results (which worked better)
Set up alerts
Get 5 real alerts
Result: Understanding signals
Week 3: Demo Trading
Goals:
Start trading signals on demo account
Gather statistics
Tasks:
Open demo account
Trade ONLY STRONG signals
Keep journal (minimum 20 trades)
Don't change indicator settings
Strictly follow stop losses
Result: 20+ documented trades
Week 4: Analysis
Goals:
Analyze demo trading results
Optimize approach
Tasks:
Calculate win rate and average R
Find patterns in profitable trades
Find patterns in losing trades
Adjust approach (not indicator!)
Write trading plan
Result: Trading plan on 1 page
Month 2: Improvement
Goals:
Deepen understanding
Add additional techniques
Tasks:
Study multi-timeframe analysis
Test combinations with Price Action
Try advanced techniques (divergences, tunnels)
Continue demo trading (minimum 50 trades)
Achieve stable profitability on demo
Result: Win rate 55%+ and Profit Factor 1.5+
Month 3: Real Trading
Goals:
Transition to real account
Maintain discipline
Tasks:
Open small real account
Trade minimum lots
Strictly follow trading plan
DON'T increase risk
Focus on process, not profit
Result: Psychological comfort on real
Month 4+: Scaling
Goals:
Increase account
Become consistently profitable
Tasks:
With 60%+ win rate can increase risk to 2%
Upon doubling account can add capital
Continue keeping journal
Periodically review and improve strategy
Share experience with community
Result: Stable profitability month after month
Additional Resources
Recommended Reading
Technical Analysis:
"Technical Analysis of Financial Markets" - John Murphy
"Trading in the Zone" - Mark Douglas (psychology)
"Market Wizards" - Jack Schwager (trader interviews)
EMA and Moving Averages:
"Moving Averages 101" - Steve Burns
Articles on Investopedia about EMA
Risk Management:
"The Mathematics of Money Management" - Ralph Vince
"Trade Your Way to Financial Freedom" - Van K. Tharp
Trading Journals:
Edgewonk (paid, very powerful)
Tradervue (free version + premium)
Excel/Google Sheets (free)
Screeners:
TradingView Stock Screener
Finviz (stocks)
CoinMarketCap (crypto)
Conclusion
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a powerful tool based on universal mathematical constants of nature. The indicator combines:
Mathematical elegance - Phi, Pi, e instead of arbitrary numbers
Premium visualization - Neon Glow, Gradient Clouds, Pulsing Bar
Reliable signals - STRONG BUY/SELL work on all timeframes
Flexibility - 6 EMA types, adaptation to any trading style
Automation - auto-sorting EMAs, SL/TP calculation, alerts
Key Success Principles:
Simplicity - start with basic settings (Phi/Pi/e, Base=10)
Discipline - follow STRONG signals strictly
Patience - wait for quality setups
Risk Management - 1-2% per trade, ALWAYS
Journal - document every trade
Learning - constantly improve skills
Remember:
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
Important is series statistics, not one trade
Psychology more important than technique
Quality more important than quantity
Process more important than result
Acknowledgments
Thank you for using Hellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium!
The indicator was created with love for mathematics, markets, and beautiful visualization.
Wishing you profitable trading!
Guide Version: 1.0
Date: 2025
Compatibility: Pine Script v6, TradingView
"In the simplicity of mathematical constants lies the complexity of market movements"
Quantum Rotational Field MappingQuantum Rotational Field Mapping (QRFM):
Phase Coherence Detection Through Complex-Plane Oscillator Analysis
Quantum Rotational Field Mapping applies complex-plane mathematics and phase-space analysis to oscillator ensembles, identifying high-probability trend ignition points by measuring when multiple independent oscillators achieve phase coherence. Unlike traditional multi-oscillator approaches that simply stack indicators or use boolean AND/OR logic, this system converts each oscillator into a rotating phasor (vector) in the complex plane and calculates the Coherence Index (CI) —a mathematical measure of how tightly aligned the ensemble has become—then generates signals only when alignment, phase direction, and pairwise entanglement all converge.
The indicator combines three mathematical frameworks: phasor representation using analytic signal theory to extract phase and amplitude from each oscillator, coherence measurement using vector summation in the complex plane to quantify group alignment, and entanglement analysis that calculates pairwise phase agreement across all oscillator combinations. This creates a multi-dimensional confirmation system that distinguishes between random oscillator noise and genuine regime transitions.
What Makes This Original
Complex-Plane Phasor Framework
This indicator implements classical signal processing mathematics adapted for market oscillators. Each oscillator—whether RSI, MACD, Stochastic, CCI, Williams %R, MFI, ROC, or TSI—is first normalized to a common scale, then converted into a complex-plane representation using an in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) component. The in-phase component is the oscillator value itself, while the quadrature component is calculated as the first difference (derivative proxy), creating a velocity-aware representation.
From these components, the system extracts:
Phase (φ) : Calculated as φ = atan2(Q, I), representing the oscillator's position in its cycle (mapped to -180° to +180°)
Amplitude (A) : Calculated as A = √(I² + Q²), representing the oscillator's strength or conviction
This mathematical approach is fundamentally different from simply reading oscillator values. A phasor captures both where an oscillator is in its cycle (phase angle) and how strongly it's expressing that position (amplitude). Two oscillators can have the same value but be in opposite phases of their cycles—traditional analysis would see them as identical, while QRFM sees them as 180° out of phase (contradictory).
Coherence Index Calculation
The core innovation is the Coherence Index (CI) , borrowed from physics and signal processing. When you have N oscillators, each with phase φₙ, you can represent each as a unit vector in the complex plane: e^(iφₙ) = cos(φₙ) + i·sin(φₙ).
The CI measures what happens when you sum all these vectors:
Resultant Vector : R = Σ e^(iφₙ) = Σ cos(φₙ) + i·Σ sin(φₙ)
Coherence Index : CI = |R| / N
Where |R| is the magnitude of the resultant vector and N is the number of active oscillators.
The CI ranges from 0 to 1:
CI = 1.0 : Perfect coherence—all oscillators have identical phase angles, vectors point in the same direction, creating maximum constructive interference
CI = 0.0 : Complete decoherence—oscillators are randomly distributed around the circle, vectors cancel out through destructive interference
0 < CI < 1 : Partial alignment—some clustering with some scatter
This is not a simple average or correlation. The CI captures phase synchronization across the entire ensemble simultaneously. When oscillators phase-lock (align their cycles), the CI spikes regardless of their individual values. This makes it sensitive to regime transitions that traditional indicators miss.
Dominant Phase and Direction Detection
Beyond measuring alignment strength, the system calculates the dominant phase of the ensemble—the direction the resultant vector points:
Dominant Phase : φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin(φₙ), Σ cos(φₙ))
This gives the "average direction" of all oscillator phases, mapped to -180° to +180°:
+90° to -90° (right half-plane): Bullish phase dominance
+90° to +180° or -90° to -180° (left half-plane): Bearish phase dominance
The combination of CI magnitude (coherence strength) and dominant phase angle (directional bias) creates a two-dimensional signal space. High CI alone is insufficient—you need high CI plus dominant phase pointing in a tradeable direction. This dual requirement is what separates QRFM from simple oscillator averaging.
Entanglement Matrix and Pairwise Coherence
While the CI measures global alignment, the entanglement matrix measures local pairwise relationships. For every pair of oscillators (i, j), the system calculates:
E(i,j) = |cos(φᵢ - φⱼ)|
This represents the phase agreement between oscillators i and j:
E = 1.0 : Oscillators are in-phase (0° or 360° apart)
E = 0.0 : Oscillators are in quadrature (90° apart, orthogonal)
E between 0 and 1 : Varying degrees of alignment
The system counts how many oscillator pairs exceed a user-defined entanglement threshold (e.g., 0.7). This entangled pairs count serves as a confirmation filter: signals require not just high global CI, but also a minimum number of strong pairwise agreements. This prevents false ignitions where CI is high but driven by only two oscillators while the rest remain scattered.
The entanglement matrix creates an N×N symmetric matrix that can be visualized as a web—when many cells are bright (high E values), the ensemble is highly interconnected. When cells are dark, oscillators are moving independently.
Phase-Lock Tolerance Mechanism
A complementary confirmation layer is the phase-lock detector . This calculates the maximum phase spread across all oscillators:
For all pairs (i,j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|, wrapping at 180°
Max Spread = maximum Δφ across all pairs
If max spread < user threshold (e.g., 35°), the ensemble is considered phase-locked —all oscillators are within a narrow angular band.
This differs from entanglement: entanglement measures pairwise cosine similarity (magnitude of alignment), while phase-lock measures maximum angular deviation (tightness of clustering). Both must be satisfied for the highest-conviction signals.
Multi-Layer Visual Architecture
QRFM includes six visual components that represent the same underlying mathematics from different perspectives:
Circular Orbit Plot : A polar coordinate grid showing each oscillator as a vector from origin to perimeter. Angle = phase, radius = amplitude. This is a real-time snapshot of the complex plane. When vectors converge (point in similar directions), coherence is high. When scattered randomly, coherence is low. Users can see phase alignment forming before CI numerically confirms it.
Phase-Time Heat Map : A 2D matrix with rows = oscillators and columns = time bins. Each cell is colored by the oscillator's phase at that time (using a gradient where color hue maps to angle). Horizontal color bands indicate sustained phase alignment over time. Vertical color bands show moments when all oscillators shared the same phase (ignition points). This provides historical pattern recognition.
Entanglement Web Matrix : An N×N grid showing E(i,j) for all pairs. Cells are colored by entanglement strength—bright yellow/gold for high E, dark gray for low E. This reveals which oscillators are driving coherence and which are lagging. For example, if RSI and MACD show high E but Stochastic shows low E with everything, Stochastic is the outlier.
Quantum Field Cloud : A background color overlay on the price chart. Color (green = bullish, red = bearish) is determined by dominant phase. Opacity is determined by CI—high CI creates dense, opaque cloud; low CI creates faint, nearly invisible cloud. This gives an atmospheric "feel" for regime strength without looking at numbers.
Phase Spiral : A smoothed plot of dominant phase over recent history, displayed as a curve that wraps around price. When the spiral is tight and rotating steadily, the ensemble is in coherent rotation (trending). When the spiral is loose or erratic, coherence is breaking down.
Dashboard : A table showing real-time metrics: CI (as percentage), dominant phase (in degrees with directional arrow), field strength (CI × average amplitude), entangled pairs count, phase-lock status (locked/unlocked), quantum state classification ("Ignition", "Coherent", "Collapse", "Chaos"), and collapse risk (recent CI change normalized to 0-100%).
Each component is independently toggleable, allowing users to customize their workspace. The orbit plot is the most essential—it provides intuitive, visual feedback on phase alignment that no numerical dashboard can match.
Core Components and How They Work Together
1. Oscillator Normalization Engine
The foundation is creating a common measurement scale. QRFM supports eight oscillators:
RSI : Normalized from to using overbought/oversold levels (70, 30) as anchors
MACD Histogram : Normalized by dividing by rolling standard deviation, then clamped to
Stochastic %K : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
CCI : Divided by 200 (typical extreme level), clamped to
Williams %R : Normalized from using (-20, -80) anchors
MFI : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
ROC : Divided by 10, clamped to
TSI : Divided by 50, clamped to
Each oscillator can be individually enabled/disabled. Only active oscillators contribute to phase calculations. The normalization removes scale differences—a reading of +0.8 means "strongly bullish" regardless of whether it came from RSI or TSI.
2. Analytic Signal Construction
For each active oscillator at each bar, the system constructs the analytic signal:
In-Phase (I) : The normalized oscillator value itself
Quadrature (Q) : The bar-to-bar change in the normalized value (first derivative approximation)
This creates a 2D representation: (I, Q). The phase is extracted as:
φ = atan2(Q, I) × (180 / π)
This maps the oscillator to a point on the unit circle. An oscillator at the same value but rising (positive Q) will have a different phase than one that is falling (negative Q). This velocity-awareness is critical—it distinguishes between "at resistance and stalling" versus "at resistance and breaking through."
The amplitude is extracted as:
A = √(I² + Q²)
This represents the distance from origin in the (I, Q) plane. High amplitude means the oscillator is far from neutral (strong conviction). Low amplitude means it's near zero (weak/transitional state).
3. Coherence Calculation Pipeline
For each bar (or every Nth bar if phase sample rate > 1 for performance):
Step 1 : Extract phase φₙ for each of the N active oscillators
Step 2 : Compute complex exponentials: Zₙ = e^(i·φₙ·π/180) = cos(φₙ·π/180) + i·sin(φₙ·π/180)
Step 3 : Sum the complex exponentials: R = Σ Zₙ = (Σ cos φₙ) + i·(Σ sin φₙ)
Step 4 : Calculate magnitude: |R| = √
Step 5 : Normalize by count: CI_raw = |R| / N
Step 6 : Smooth the CI: CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
The smoothing step (default 2 bars) removes single-bar noise spikes while preserving structural coherence changes. Users can adjust this to control reactivity versus stability.
The dominant phase is calculated as:
φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin φₙ, Σ cos φₙ) × (180 / π)
This is the angle of the resultant vector R in the complex plane.
4. Entanglement Matrix Construction
For all unique pairs of oscillators (i, j) where i < j:
Step 1 : Get phases φᵢ and φⱼ
Step 2 : Compute phase difference: Δφ = φᵢ - φⱼ (in radians)
Step 3 : Calculate entanglement: E(i,j) = |cos(Δφ)|
Step 4 : Store in symmetric matrix: matrix = matrix = E(i,j)
The matrix is then scanned: count how many E(i,j) values exceed the user-defined threshold (default 0.7). This count is the entangled pairs metric.
For visualization, the matrix is rendered as an N×N table where cell brightness maps to E(i,j) intensity.
5. Phase-Lock Detection
Step 1 : For all unique pairs (i, j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|
Step 2 : Wrap angles: if Δφ > 180°, set Δφ = 360° - Δφ
Step 3 : Find maximum: max_spread = max(Δφ) across all pairs
Step 4 : Compare to tolerance: phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
If phase_locked is true, all oscillators are within the specified angular cone (e.g., 35°). This is a boolean confirmation filter.
6. Signal Generation Logic
Signals are generated through multi-layer confirmation:
Long Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold (e.g., 0.80)
AND dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° < φ_dom < +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold (e.g., 4)
Short Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold
AND dominant phase is in bearish range (φ_dom < -90° OR φ_dom > +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold
Collapse Signal :
CI at bar minus CI at current bar > collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55)
AND CI at bar was above 0.6 (must collapse from coherent state, not from already-low state)
These are strict conditions. A high CI alone does not generate a signal—dominant phase must align with direction, oscillators must be phase-locked, and sufficient pairwise entanglement must exist. This multi-factor gating dramatically reduces false signals compared to single-condition triggers.
Calculation Methodology
Phase 1: Oscillator Computation and Normalization
On each bar, the system calculates the raw values for all enabled oscillators using standard Pine Script functions:
RSI: ta.rsi(close, length)
MACD: ta.macd() returning histogram component
Stochastic: ta.stoch() smoothed with ta.sma()
CCI: ta.cci(close, length)
Williams %R: ta.wpr(length)
MFI: ta.mfi(hlc3, length)
ROC: ta.roc(close, length)
TSI: ta.tsi(close, short, long)
Each raw value is then passed through a normalization function:
normalize(value, overbought_level, oversold_level) = 2 × (value - oversold) / (overbought - oversold) - 1
This maps the oscillator's typical range to , where -1 represents extreme bearish, 0 represents neutral, and +1 represents extreme bullish.
For oscillators without fixed ranges (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization is used: divide by a rolling standard deviation or fixed divisor, then clamp to .
Phase 2: Phasor Extraction
For each normalized oscillator value val:
I = val (in-phase component)
Q = val - val (quadrature component, first difference)
Phase calculation:
phi_rad = atan2(Q, I)
phi_deg = phi_rad × (180 / π)
Amplitude calculation:
A = √(I² + Q²)
These values are stored in arrays: osc_phases and osc_amps for each oscillator n.
Phase 3: Complex Summation and Coherence
Initialize accumulators:
sum_cos = 0
sum_sin = 0
For each oscillator n = 0 to N-1:
phi_rad = osc_phases × (π / 180)
sum_cos += cos(phi_rad)
sum_sin += sin(phi_rad)
Resultant magnitude:
resultant_mag = √(sum_cos² + sum_sin²)
Coherence Index (raw):
CI_raw = resultant_mag / N
Smoothed CI:
CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
Dominant phase:
phi_dom_rad = atan2(sum_sin, sum_cos)
phi_dom_deg = phi_dom_rad × (180 / π)
Phase 4: Entanglement Matrix Population
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
phi_i = osc_phases × (π / 180)
phi_j = osc_phases × (π / 180)
delta_phi = phi_i - phi_j
E = |cos(delta_phi)|
matrix_index_ij = i × N + j
matrix_index_ji = j × N + i
entangle_matrix = E
entangle_matrix = E
if E >= threshold:
entangled_pairs += 1
The matrix uses flat array storage with index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col.
Phase 5: Phase-Lock Check
max_spread = 0
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
delta = |osc_phases - osc_phases |
if delta > 180:
delta = 360 - delta
max_spread = max(max_spread, delta)
phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
Phase 6: Signal Evaluation
Ignition Long :
ignition_long = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Ignition Short :
ignition_short = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom < -90 OR phi_dom > 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Collapse :
CI_prev = CI
collapse = (CI_prev - CI > collapse_threshold) AND (CI_prev > 0.6)
All signals are evaluated on bar close. The crossover and crossunder functions ensure signals fire only once when conditions transition from false to true.
Phase 7: Field Strength and Visualization Metrics
Average Amplitude :
avg_amp = (Σ osc_amps ) / N
Field Strength :
field_strength = CI × avg_amp
Collapse Risk (for dashboard):
collapse_risk = (CI - CI) / max(CI , 0.1)
collapse_risk_pct = clamp(collapse_risk × 100, 0, 100)
Quantum State Classification :
if (CI > threshold AND phase_locked):
state = "Ignition"
else if (CI > 0.6):
state = "Coherent"
else if (collapse):
state = "Collapse"
else:
state = "Chaos"
Phase 8: Visual Rendering
Orbit Plot : For each oscillator, convert polar (phase, amplitude) to Cartesian (x, y) for grid placement:
radius = amplitude × grid_center × 0.8
x = radius × cos(phase × π/180)
y = radius × sin(phase × π/180)
col = center + x (mapped to grid coordinates)
row = center - y
Heat Map : For each oscillator row and time column, retrieve historical phase value at lookback = (columns - col) × sample_rate, then map phase to color using a hue gradient.
Entanglement Web : Render matrix as table cell with background color opacity = E(i,j).
Field Cloud : Background color = (phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) ? green : red, with opacity = mix(min_opacity, max_opacity, CI).
All visual components render only on the last bar (barstate.islast) to minimize computational overhead.
How to Use This Indicator
Step 1 : Apply QRFM to your chart. It works on all timeframes and asset classes, though 15-minute to 4-hour timeframes provide the best balance of responsiveness and noise reduction.
Step 2 : Enable the dashboard (default: top right) and the circular orbit plot (default: middle left). These are your primary visual feedback tools.
Step 3 : Optionally enable the heat map, entanglement web, and field cloud based on your preference. New users may find all visuals overwhelming; start with dashboard + orbit plot.
Step 4 : Observe for 50-100 bars to let the indicator establish baseline coherence patterns. Markets have different "normal" CI ranges—some instruments naturally run higher or lower coherence.
Understanding the Circular Orbit Plot
The orbit plot is a polar grid showing oscillator vectors in real-time:
Center point : Neutral (zero phase and amplitude)
Each vector : A line from center to a point on the grid
Vector angle : The oscillator's phase (0° = right/east, 90° = up/north, 180° = left/west, -90° = down/south)
Vector length : The oscillator's amplitude (short = weak signal, long = strong signal)
Vector label : First letter of oscillator name (R = RSI, M = MACD, etc.)
What to watch :
Convergence : When all vectors cluster in one quadrant or sector, CI is rising and coherence is forming. This is your pre-signal warning.
Scatter : When vectors point in random directions (360° spread), CI is low and the market is in a non-trending or transitional regime.
Rotation : When the cluster rotates smoothly around the circle, the ensemble is in coherent oscillation—typically seen during steady trends.
Sudden flips : When the cluster rapidly jumps from one side to the opposite (e.g., +90° to -90°), a phase reversal has occurred—often coinciding with trend reversals.
Example: If you see RSI, MACD, and Stochastic all pointing toward 45° (northeast) with long vectors, while CCI, TSI, and ROC point toward 40-50° as well, coherence is high and dominant phase is bullish. Expect an ignition signal if CI crosses threshold.
Reading Dashboard Metrics
The dashboard provides numerical confirmation of what the orbit plot shows visually:
CI : Displays as 0-100%. Above 70% = high coherence (strong regime), 40-70% = moderate, below 40% = low (poor conditions for trend entries).
Dom Phase : Angle in degrees with directional arrow. ⬆ = bullish bias, ⬇ = bearish bias, ⬌ = neutral.
Field Strength : CI weighted by amplitude. High values (> 0.6) indicate not just alignment but strong alignment.
Entangled Pairs : Count of oscillator pairs with E > threshold. Higher = more confirmation. If minimum is set to 4, you need at least 4 pairs entangled for signals.
Phase Lock : 🔒 YES (all oscillators within tolerance) or 🔓 NO (spread too wide).
State : Real-time classification:
🚀 IGNITION: CI just crossed threshold with phase-lock
⚡ COHERENT: CI is high and stable
💥 COLLAPSE: CI has dropped sharply
🌀 CHAOS: Low CI, scattered phases
Collapse Risk : 0-100% scale based on recent CI change. Above 50% warns of imminent breakdown.
Interpreting Signals
Long Ignition (Blue Triangle Below Price) :
Occurs when CI crosses above threshold (e.g., 0.80)
Dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° to +90°)
All oscillators are phase-locked (within tolerance)
Minimum entangled pairs requirement met
Interpretation : The oscillator ensemble has transitioned from disorder to coherent bullish alignment. This is a high-probability long entry point. The multi-layer confirmation (CI + phase direction + lock + entanglement) ensures this is not a single-oscillator whipsaw.
Short Ignition (Red Triangle Above Price) :
Same conditions as long, but dominant phase is in bearish range (< -90° or > +90°)
Interpretation : Coherent bearish alignment has formed. High-probability short entry.
Collapse (Circles Above and Below Price) :
CI has dropped by more than the collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55) over a 5-bar window
CI was previously above 0.6 (collapsing from coherent state)
Interpretation : Phase coherence has broken down. If you are in a position, this is an exit warning. If looking to enter, stand aside—regime is transitioning.
Phase-Time Heat Map Patterns
Enable the heat map and position it at bottom right. The rows represent individual oscillators, columns represent time bins (most recent on left).
Pattern: Horizontal Color Bands
If a row (e.g., RSI) shows consistent color across columns (say, green for several bins), that oscillator has maintained stable phase over time. If all rows show horizontal bands of similar color, the entire ensemble has been phase-locked for an extended period—this is a strong trending regime.
Pattern: Vertical Color Bands
If a column (single time bin) shows all cells with the same or very similar color, that moment in time had high coherence. These vertical bands often align with ignition signals or major price pivots.
Pattern: Rainbow Chaos
If cells are random colors (red, green, yellow mixed with no pattern), coherence is low. The ensemble is scattered. Avoid trading during these periods unless you have external confirmation.
Pattern: Color Transition
If you see a row transition from red to green (or vice versa) sharply, that oscillator has phase-flipped. If multiple rows do this simultaneously, a regime change is underway.
Entanglement Web Analysis
Enable the web matrix (default: opposite corner from heat map). It shows an N×N grid where N = number of active oscillators.
Bright Yellow/Gold Cells : High pairwise entanglement. For example, if the RSI-MACD cell is bright gold, those two oscillators are moving in phase. If the RSI-Stochastic cell is bright, they are entangled as well.
Dark Gray Cells : Low entanglement. Oscillators are decorrelated or in quadrature.
Diagonal : Always marked with "—" because an oscillator is always perfectly entangled with itself.
How to use :
Scan for clustering: If most cells are bright, coherence is high across the board. If only a few cells are bright, coherence is driven by a subset (e.g., RSI and MACD are aligned, but nothing else is—weak signal).
Identify laggards: If one row/column is entirely dark, that oscillator is the outlier. You may choose to disable it or monitor for when it joins the group (late confirmation).
Watch for web formation: During low-coherence periods, the matrix is mostly dark. As coherence builds, cells begin lighting up. A sudden "web" of connections forming visually precedes ignition signals.
Trading Workflow
Step 1: Monitor Coherence Level
Check the dashboard CI metric or observe the orbit plot. If CI is below 40% and vectors are scattered, conditions are poor for trend entries. Wait.
Step 2: Detect Coherence Building
When CI begins rising (say, from 30% to 50-60%) and you notice vectors on the orbit plot starting to cluster, coherence is forming. This is your alert phase—do not enter yet, but prepare.
Step 3: Confirm Phase Direction
Check the dominant phase angle and the orbit plot quadrant where clustering is occurring:
Clustering in right half (0° to ±90°): Bullish bias forming
Clustering in left half (±90° to 180°): Bearish bias forming
Verify the dashboard shows the corresponding directional arrow (⬆ or ⬇).
Step 4: Wait for Signal Confirmation
Do not enter based on rising CI alone. Wait for the full ignition signal:
CI crosses above threshold
Phase-lock indicator shows 🔒 YES
Entangled pairs count >= minimum
Directional triangle appears on chart
This ensures all layers have aligned.
Step 5: Execute Entry
Long : Blue triangle below price appears → enter long
Short : Red triangle above price appears → enter short
Step 6: Position Management
Initial Stop : Place stop loss based on your risk management rules (e.g., recent swing low/high, ATR-based buffer).
Monitoring :
Watch the field cloud density. If it remains opaque and colored in your direction, the regime is intact.
Check dashboard collapse risk. If it rises above 50%, prepare for exit.
Monitor the orbit plot. If vectors begin scattering or the cluster flips to the opposite side, coherence is breaking.
Exit Triggers :
Collapse signal fires (circles appear)
Dominant phase flips to opposite half-plane
CI drops below 40% (coherence lost)
Price hits your profit target or trailing stop
Step 7: Post-Exit Analysis
After exiting, observe whether a new ignition forms in the opposite direction (reversal) or if CI remains low (transition to range). Use this to decide whether to re-enter, reverse, or stand aside.
Best Practices
Use Price Structure as Context
QRFM identifies when coherence forms but does not specify where price will go. Combine ignition signals with support/resistance levels, trendlines, or chart patterns. For example:
Long ignition near a major support level after a pullback: high-probability bounce
Long ignition in the middle of a range with no structure: lower probability
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation
Open QRFM on two timeframes simultaneously:
Higher timeframe (e.g., 4-hour): Use CI level to determine regime bias. If 4H CI is above 60% and dominant phase is bullish, the market is in a bullish regime.
Lower timeframe (e.g., 15-minute): Execute entries on ignition signals that align with the higher timeframe bias.
This prevents counter-trend trades and increases win rate.
Distinguish Between Regime Types
High CI, stable dominant phase (State: Coherent) : Trending market. Ignitions are continuation signals; collapses are profit-taking or reversal warnings.
Low CI, erratic dominant phase (State: Chaos) : Ranging or choppy market. Avoid ignition signals or reduce position size. Wait for coherence to establish.
Moderate CI with frequent collapses : Whipsaw environment. Use wider stops or stand aside.
Adjust Parameters to Instrument and Timeframe
Crypto/Forex (high volatility) : Lower ignition threshold (0.65-0.75), lower CI smoothing (2-3), shorter oscillator lengths (7-10).
Stocks/Indices (moderate volatility) : Standard settings (threshold 0.75-0.85, smoothing 5-7, oscillator lengths 14).
Lower timeframes (5-15 min) : Reduce phase sample rate to 1-2 for responsiveness.
Higher timeframes (daily+) : Increase CI smoothing and oscillator lengths for noise reduction.
Use Entanglement Count as Conviction Filter
The minimum entangled pairs setting controls signal strictness:
Low (1-2) : More signals, lower quality (acceptable if you have other confirmation)
Medium (3-5) : Balanced (recommended for most traders)
High (6+) : Very strict, fewer signals, highest quality
Adjust based on your trade frequency preference and risk tolerance.
Monitor Oscillator Contribution
Use the entanglement web to see which oscillators are driving coherence. If certain oscillators are consistently dark (low E with all others), they may be adding noise. Consider disabling them. For example:
On low-volume instruments, MFI may be unreliable → disable MFI
On strongly trending instruments, mean-reversion oscillators (Stochastic, RSI) may lag → reduce weight or disable
Respect the Collapse Signal
Collapse events are early warnings. Price may continue in the original direction for several bars after collapse fires, but the underlying regime has weakened. Best practice:
If in profit: Take partial or full profit on collapse
If at breakeven/small loss: Exit immediately
If collapse occurs shortly after entry: Likely a false ignition; exit to avoid drawdown
Collapses do not guarantee immediate reversals—they signal uncertainty .
Combine with Volume Analysis
If your instrument has reliable volume:
Ignitions with expanding volume: Higher conviction
Ignitions with declining volume: Weaker, possibly false
Collapses with volume spikes: Strong reversal signal
Collapses with low volume: May just be consolidation
Volume is not built into QRFM (except via MFI), so add it as external confirmation.
Observe the Phase Spiral
The spiral provides a quick visual cue for rotation consistency:
Tight, smooth spiral : Ensemble is rotating coherently (trending)
Loose, erratic spiral : Phase is jumping around (ranging or transitional)
If the spiral tightens, coherence is building. If it loosens, coherence is dissolving.
Do Not Overtrade Low-Coherence Periods
When CI is persistently below 40% and the state is "Chaos," the market is not in a regime where phase analysis is predictive. During these times:
Reduce position size
Widen stops
Wait for coherence to return
QRFM's strength is regime detection. If there is no regime, the tool correctly signals "stand aside."
Use Alerts Strategically
Set alerts for:
Long Ignition
Short Ignition
Collapse
Phase Lock (optional)
Configure alerts to "Once per bar close" to avoid intrabar repainting and noise. When an alert fires, manually verify:
Orbit plot shows clustering
Dashboard confirms all conditions
Price structure supports the trade
Do not blindly trade alerts—use them as prompts for analysis.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance
Instruments :
Liquid, actively traded markets (major forex pairs, large-cap stocks, major indices, top-tier crypto)
Instruments with clear cyclical oscillator behavior (avoid extremely illiquid or manipulated markets)
Timeframes :
15-minute to 4-hour: Optimal balance of noise reduction and responsiveness
1-hour to daily: Slower, higher-conviction signals; good for swing trading
5-minute: Acceptable for scalping if parameters are tightened and you accept more noise
Market Regimes :
Trending markets with periodic retracements (where oscillators cycle through phases predictably)
Breakout environments (coherence forms before/during breakout; collapse occurs at exhaustion)
Rotational markets with clear swings (oscillators phase-lock at turning points)
Volatility :
Moderate to high volatility (oscillators have room to move through their ranges)
Stable volatility regimes (sudden VIX spikes or flash crashes may create false collapses)
Challenging Conditions
Instruments :
Very low liquidity markets (erratic price action creates unstable oscillator phases)
Heavily news-driven instruments (fundamentals may override technical coherence)
Highly correlated instruments (oscillators may all reflect the same underlying factor, reducing independence)
Market Regimes :
Deep, prolonged consolidation (oscillators remain near neutral, CI is chronically low, few signals fire)
Extreme chop with no directional bias (oscillators whipsaw, coherence never establishes)
Gap-driven markets (large overnight gaps create phase discontinuities)
Timeframes :
Sub-5-minute charts: Noise dominates; oscillators flip rapidly; coherence is fleeting and unreliable
Weekly/monthly: Oscillators move extremely slowly; signals are rare; better suited for long-term positioning than active trading
Special Cases :
During major economic releases or earnings: Oscillators may lag price or become decorrelated as fundamentals overwhelm technicals. Reduce position size or stand aside.
In extremely low-volatility environments (e.g., holiday periods): Oscillators compress to neutral, CI may be artificially high due to lack of movement, but signals lack follow-through.
Adaptive Behavior
QRFM is designed to self-adapt to poor conditions:
When coherence is genuinely absent, CI remains low and signals do not fire
When only a subset of oscillators aligns, entangled pairs count stays below threshold and signals are filtered out
When phase-lock cannot be achieved (oscillators too scattered), the lock filter prevents signals
This means the indicator will naturally produce fewer (or zero) signals during unfavorable conditions, rather than generating false signals. This is a feature —it keeps you out of low-probability trades.
Parameter Optimization by Trading Style
Scalping (5-15 Minute Charts)
Goal : Maximum responsiveness, accept higher noise
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 7-10
MACD: 8/17/6
Stochastic: 8-10, smooth 2-3
CCI: 14-16
Others: 8-12
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 2-3 bars (fast reaction)
Phase Sample Rate: 1 (every bar)
Ignition Threshold: 0.65-0.75 (lower for more signals)
Collapse Threshold: 0.40-0.50 (earlier exit warnings)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 40-50° (looser, easier to achieve)
Min Entangled Pairs: 2-3 (fewer oscillators required)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard only (reduce screen clutter for fast decisions)
Disable heavy visuals (heat map, web) for performance
Alerts :
Enable all ignition and collapse alerts
Set to "Once per bar close"
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Goal : Balance between responsiveness and reliability
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14 (standard)
MACD: 12/26/9 (standard)
Stochastic: 14, smooth 3
CCI: 20
Others: 10-14
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 3-5 bars (balanced)
Phase Sample Rate: 2-3
Ignition Threshold: 0.75-0.85 (moderate selectivity)
Collapse Threshold: 0.50-0.55 (balanced exit timing)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 30-40° (moderate tightness)
Min Entangled Pairs: 4-5 (reasonable confirmation)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard + Heat Map or Web (choose one)
Field Cloud for regime backdrop
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse alerts
Optional phase-lock alert for advance warning
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Goal : High-conviction signals, minimal noise, fewer trades
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14-21
MACD: 12/26/9 or 19/39/9 (longer variant)
Stochastic: 14-21, smooth 3-5
CCI: 20-30
Others: 14-20
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 5-10 bars (very smooth)
Phase Sample Rate: 3-5
Ignition Threshold: 0.80-0.90 (high bar for entry)
Collapse Threshold: 0.55-0.65 (only significant breakdowns)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 20-30° (tight clustering required)
Min Entangled Pairs: 5-7 (strong confirmation)
Visuals :
All modules enabled (you have time to analyze)
Heat Map for multi-bar pattern recognition
Web for deep confirmation analysis
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse
Review manually before entering (no rush)
Position/Long-Term Trading (Daily to Weekly Charts)
Goal : Rare, very high-conviction regime shifts
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 21-30
MACD: 19/39/9 or 26/52/12
Stochastic: 21, smooth 5
CCI: 30-50
Others: 20-30
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 10-14 bars
Phase Sample Rate: 5 (every 5th bar to reduce computation)
Ignition Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (only extreme alignment)
Collapse Threshold: 0.60-0.70 (major regime breaks only)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 15-25° (very tight)
Min Entangled Pairs: 6+ (broad consensus required)
Visuals :
Dashboard + Orbit Plot for quick checks
Heat Map to study historical coherence patterns
Web to verify deep entanglement
Alerts :
Ignition only (collapses are less critical on long timeframes)
Manual review with fundamental analysis overlay
Performance Optimization (Low-End Systems)
If you experience lag or slow rendering:
Reduce Visual Load :
Orbit Grid Size: 8-10 (instead of 12+)
Heat Map Time Bins: 5-8 (instead of 10+)
Disable Web Matrix entirely if not needed
Disable Field Cloud and Phase Spiral
Reduce Calculation Frequency :
Phase Sample Rate: 5-10 (calculate every 5-10 bars)
Max History Depth: 100-200 (instead of 500+)
Disable Unused Oscillators :
If you only want RSI, MACD, and Stochastic, disable the other five. Fewer oscillators = smaller matrices, faster loops.
Simplify Dashboard :
Choose "Small" dashboard size
Reduce number of metrics displayed
These settings will not significantly degrade signal quality (signals are based on bar-close calculations, which remain accurate), but will improve chart responsiveness.
Important Disclaimers
This indicator is a technical analysis tool designed to identify periods of phase coherence across an ensemble of oscillators. It is not a standalone trading system and does not guarantee profitable trades. The Coherence Index, dominant phase, and entanglement metrics are mathematical calculations applied to historical price data—they measure past oscillator behavior and do not predict future price movements with certainty.
No Predictive Guarantee : High coherence indicates that oscillators are currently aligned, which historically has coincided with trending or directional price movement. However, past alignment does not guarantee future trends. Markets can remain coherent while prices consolidate, or lose coherence suddenly due to news, liquidity changes, or other factors not captured by oscillator mathematics.
Signal Confirmation is Probabilistic : The multi-layer confirmation system (CI threshold + dominant phase + phase-lock + entanglement) is designed to filter out low-probability setups. This increases the proportion of valid signals relative to false signals, but does not eliminate false signals entirely. Users should combine QRFM with additional analysis—support and resistance levels, volume confirmation, multi-timeframe alignment, and fundamental context—before executing trades.
Collapse Signals are Warnings, Not Reversals : A coherence collapse indicates that the oscillator ensemble has lost alignment. This often precedes trend exhaustion or reversals, but can also occur during healthy pullbacks or consolidations. Price may continue in the original direction after a collapse. Use collapses as risk management cues (tighten stops, take partial profits) rather than automatic reversal entries.
Market Regime Dependency : QRFM performs best in markets where oscillators exhibit cyclical, mean-reverting behavior and where trends are punctuated by retracements. In markets dominated by fundamental shocks, gap openings, or extreme low-liquidity conditions, oscillator coherence may be less reliable. During such periods, reduce position size or stand aside.
Risk Management is Essential : All trading involves risk of loss. Use appropriate stop losses, position sizing, and risk-per-trade limits. The indicator does not specify stop loss or take profit levels—these must be determined by the user based on their risk tolerance and account size. Never risk more than you can afford to lose.
Parameter Sensitivity : The indicator's behavior changes with input parameters. Aggressive settings (low thresholds, loose tolerances) produce more signals with lower average quality. Conservative settings (high thresholds, tight tolerances) produce fewer signals with higher average quality. Users should backtest and forward-test parameter sets on their specific instruments and timeframes before committing real capital.
No Repainting by Design : All signal conditions are evaluated on bar close using bar-close values. However, the visual components (orbit plot, heat map, dashboard) update in real-time during bar formation for monitoring purposes. For trade execution, rely on the confirmed signals (triangles and circles) that appear only after the bar closes.
Computational Load : QRFM performs extensive calculations, including nested loops for entanglement matrices and real-time table rendering. On lower-powered devices or when running multiple indicators simultaneously, users may experience lag. Use the performance optimization settings (reduce visual complexity, increase phase sample rate, disable unused oscillators) to improve responsiveness.
This system is most effective when used as one component within a broader trading methodology that includes sound risk management, multi-timeframe analysis, market context awareness, and disciplined execution. It is a tool for regime detection and signal confirmation, not a substitute for comprehensive trade planning.
Technical Notes
Calculation Timing : All signal logic (ignition, collapse) is evaluated using bar-close values. The barstate.isconfirmed or implicit bar-close behavior ensures signals do not repaint. Visual components (tables, plots) render on every tick for real-time feedback but do not affect signal generation.
Phase Wrapping : Phase angles are calculated in the range -180° to +180° using atan2. Angular distance calculations account for wrapping (e.g., the distance between +170° and -170° is 20°, not 340°). This ensures phase-lock detection works correctly across the ±180° boundary.
Array Management : The indicator uses fixed-size arrays for oscillator phases, amplitudes, and the entanglement matrix. The maximum number of oscillators is 8. If fewer oscillators are enabled, array sizes shrink accordingly (only active oscillators are processed).
Matrix Indexing : The entanglement matrix is stored as a flat array with size N×N, where N is the number of active oscillators. Index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col. Symmetric pairs (i,j) and (j,i) are stored identically.
Normalization Stability : Oscillators are normalized to using fixed reference levels (e.g., RSI overbought/oversold at 70/30). For unbounded oscillators (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization (division by rolling standard deviation) is used, with clamping to prevent extreme outliers from distorting phase calculations.
Smoothing and Lag : The CI smoothing window (SMA) introduces lag proportional to the window size. This is intentional—it filters out single-bar noise spikes in coherence. Users requiring faster reaction can reduce the smoothing window to 1-2 bars, at the cost of increased sensitivity to noise.
Complex Number Representation : Pine Script does not have native complex number types. Complex arithmetic is implemented using separate real and imaginary accumulators (sum_cos, sum_sin) and manual calculation of magnitude (sqrt(real² + imag²)) and argument (atan2(imag, real)).
Lookback Limits : The indicator respects Pine Script's maximum lookback constraints. Historical phase and amplitude values are accessed using the operator, with lookback limited to the chart's available bar history (max_bars_back=5000 declared).
Visual Rendering Performance : Tables (orbit plot, heat map, web, dashboard) are conditionally deleted and recreated on each update using table.delete() and table.new(). This prevents memory leaks but incurs redraw overhead. Rendering is restricted to barstate.islast (last bar) to minimize computational load—historical bars do not render visuals.
Alert Condition Triggers : alertcondition() functions evaluate on bar close when their boolean conditions transition from false to true. Alerts do not fire repeatedly while a condition remains true (e.g., CI stays above threshold for 10 bars fires only once on the initial cross).
Color Gradient Functions : The phaseColor() function maps phase angles to RGB hues using sine waves offset by 120° (red, green, blue channels). This creates a continuous spectrum where -180° to +180° spans the full color wheel. The amplitudeColor() function maps amplitude to grayscale intensity. The coherenceColor() function uses cos(phase) to map contribution to CI (positive = green, negative = red).
No External Data Requests : QRFM operates entirely on the chart's symbol and timeframe. It does not use request.security() or access external data sources. All calculations are self-contained, avoiding lookahead bias from higher-timeframe requests.
Deterministic Behavior : Given identical input parameters and price data, QRFM produces identical outputs. There are no random elements, probabilistic sampling, or time-of-day dependencies.
— Dskyz, Engineering precision. Trading coherence.
Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener v11. Overview & Originality
This script is an advanced, all-in-one screening tool designed specifically to identify high-potential, trend-following opportunities within the cryptocurrency market. While many screeners focus on single conditions, the "Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener" is original in its multi-layered approach, combining seven distinct logical checks into a single, cohesive framework.
Its primary innovation is the calculation of a "Total Score," which quantifies how well an asset conforms to the ideal characteristics of a tradable trend. This allows traders to move beyond simple binary (yes/no) filtering and instead rank the entire market to find the absolute best candidates that match their strategy.
The script is fully compatible with the TradingView Pine Screener, outputting each individual condition and the Total Score as separate columns for powerful, flexible market analysis.
2. Core Concepts & How It Works
This screener is built on the core principles of classic trend-following. It evaluates assets against a comprehensive checklist to ensure they are not only trending, but are also liquid, volatile, and at a strategic entry point.
The script systematically checks for:
Liquidity: Ensures the asset is actively traded with significant dollar volume, which is crucial for minimizing slippage. It checks both the daily turnover and the 30-day average volume.
Trend Confirmation: Utilizes a dual-moving average system (20/50 SMA default) to confirm the underlying trend direction. It also includes an optional filter to ensure the long-term moving average is actively sloping upwards, confirming trend health.
Trend Strength: Employs the Average Directional Index (ADX) to measure the strength of the trend, filtering out weak or choppy price action.
Momentum: Uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to confirm that the asset has positive momentum, as strong trends are supported by sustained buying pressure.
Volatility: Measures volatility using the Average True Range (ATR) as a percentage of the price. This ensures the asset has enough movement to be profitable, a key factor in the 24/7 crypto market.
Strategic Entry: Offers a user-selectable "Entry Mode." You can choose between:
Breakout Mode: Identifies assets breaking out to new highs on a surge of volume.
Pullback Mode: Identifies assets already in a strong uptrend that are experiencing a healthy dip to a key moving average, offering a potentially better risk/reward entry.
3. How to Use This Script
This indicator is designed for two primary workflows:
Single-Asset Analysis: When you apply the script to any crypto chart, a detailed diagnostic table will appear in the bottom-right corner. This table provides a real-time checklist, showing true or false for each of the 7 conditions and the final score, allowing for a quick and deep analysis of any individual asset.
Full Market Screening (Recommended):
Open the Crypto Screener on TradingView.
Click the "Filters" button and at the bottom of the menu, select this script ("Ultimate Crypto Trend & Liquidity Screener").
Click the "Columns" button on the screener and add the columns generated by this script, such as "Total Score," "Liquidity OK," "Entry Signal OK," etc.
You can now sort the entire crypto market by "Total Score" to instantly find the strongest candidates, or filter for assets that meet specific conditions (e.g., Total Score > 5 ).
4. Inputs & Customization
All parameters within this script are fully customizable via the "Settings" menu. The default values have been tuned for general use in the crypto market (e.g., faster moving averages, higher volatility thresholds), but you are encouraged to adjust them to fit your specific trading style, preferred timeframes, and risk tolerance.
5. Disclaimer
This tool is designed for educational and analytical purposes to aid in the decision-making process. It does not provide financial advice or guarantee trading success. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Always use this screener in conjunction with your own comprehensive analysis and robust risk management practices. This script is published open-source to encourage community learning and collaboration.
